JP2016147171A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress a decrease in interest in a game while avoiding incompatibility between a performance and a stage even if a performance selected in advance regarding predetermined variation is a unique performance corresponding to a stage, and the stage is changed until the variation is started.SOLUTION: A previous determination performance scenario is stored by suspending a lottery opportunity when the new lottery opportunity occurs, by holding a new lottery opportunity when it occurs, by predetermining a predetermined lottery result relating to the held lottery opportunity, and by predetermining a category of a notice performance having contents for suggesting a possibility that a pattern may be stopped in a winning mode. When a stage change performance is not executed until variation display (said variation) of the pattern corresponding to the held lottery opportunity is started, the stored previous determination performance scenario is used to determine the contents of the notice performance. When the stage change performance is executed before the variation is started, the contents of the notice performance are determined without using the previous determination performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 85

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an upper limit is set for the number of times that a specific winning type can be successively applied among a plurality of winning types.

  Conventionally, when the lottery result corresponds to one of the winning types, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the symbol is displayed in a stop with the symbol representing the winning type. A gaming machine that executes a game and pays a large amount of prize balls to the player is known. Various effects are performed on the image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) during the variable display of the symbols to improve the expectation corresponding to the big hit, and during the stop display, the player is informed whether or not the winner has been won. An effect to perform is performed.

  Further, when a new lottery opportunity occurs during the change of the symbol, a lottery random number necessary for the lottery is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), and the fact that the lottery random number has been stored is stored in the image display device. Was teaching. For example, when a lottery random number is stored, the reserved image is displayed on the image display device, and when the lottery random number is stored and the lottery is performed, the displayed reserved image is deleted. Further, the number of reserved images is displayed on the image display device in accordance with the number of lottery random numbers currently stored. By applying a special image as the reserved image, a gaming machine is known that teaches the player that the special effect is executed in the variation in which the reserved image is consumed before the variation starts. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1). Therefore, the player has been able to entertain the game while having a sense of expectation for the big hit before the change starts.

JP 2012-019998 A

  According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when a lottery random number is stored, it is determined in advance by determining what kind of special effect is executed in the variation corresponding to the lottery random number. It has been determined whether or not to apply a special image corresponding to the confirmed special effect to the reserved image. In other words, this indicates that the effect to be performed at the time of variation is determined in advance at the time when the lottery random number is stored, and the notice effect can be determined in advance for the effect.

  Here, a plurality of types of notice effects are prepared in advance. Specifically, specific notice effects corresponding to a predetermined stage (background image) and normal notice effects corresponding to a plurality of stages are prepared. Any one of them was selected in advance when the random numbers were stored. However, since the stage may be changed from the time when the lottery random number is stored until the change corresponding to the lottery random number is started, the pre-selected one is changed to the stage before the change. In the case of the corresponding specific notice effect, there is a fear that the notice effect that does not correspond to the stage is executed at the time of the change, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player in the game is reduced.

  Therefore, even if a stage is selected in advance for a predetermined variation, and the stage is changed before the variation is started, a technology that suppresses a decrease in interest in the game while avoiding inconsistency between the stage and the stage. The purpose is to provide.

The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems.
Solution D1: In the gaming machine of the present invention, the lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery is executed on the condition that a lottery opportunity has occurred during the game, and the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery execution means. There is a possibility that the predetermined lottery result is won in the symbol display means for displaying the symbol variation preset according to the lottery result and the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. The notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect that suggests the background effect, the background effect execution means for executing the background effect using at least a predetermined background image in the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display are started. When a new lottery opportunity occurs in a state where the starting conditions for the lottery are not satisfied, the lottery opportunity holding means for holding the lottery opportunity and the lottery opportunity holding means hold Pre-determining means for preliminarily determining information related to the lottery opportunity, and when the result of the pre-determination regarding the held lottery opportunity is obtained by the pre-determining means in a state satisfying a predetermined condition, the prior determination Based on the result of the above, the notice effect pre-selecting means for determining in advance the information related to the notice effect that is performed in the variable display of the symbol according to the reserved lottery opportunity, and the determination result by the notice effect pre-selecting means Preliminary effect pre-stored means for storing, background change effect executing means for executing a background change effect of changing the background image of the background effect to another background image when a predetermined effect execution trigger occurs, and the symbol display With respect to the display of the symbol change related to the reserved lottery opportunity by the means, the background before the symbol change display according to the reserved lottery opportunity is performed. When the further effect is executed, the content of the notice effect is determined without using the determination result, while the background change effect is performed before the change display of the symbol according to the reserved lottery opportunity is performed. When not being executed, a notice effect content determining means for determining the content of the notice effect using the determination result is provided.
The present invention can also employ the following solutions.
Solution 1: The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery on the condition that a lottery opportunity has occurred during the game, and the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery execution means. It is suggested that there is a possibility that the result of the predetermined lottery may be won in the symbol display means for displaying a variation of a symbol set in advance according to the result of the lottery and the variation display by the symbol display means A notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect, a background effect executing means for executing a background effect using at least a predetermined background image in the variable display, and a start condition for starting the variable display. The lottery opportunity holding means for holding the lottery opportunity when a new lottery opportunity occurs in a state that has not been performed, and the lottery opportunity held by the lottery opportunity holding means The result of the predetermined lottery pre-determination regarding the suspended lottery opportunity is obtained by the pre-determination unit in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied and the pre-determination unit that determines a predetermined lottery result in advance. A notice effect type pre-selecting means for selectively determining in advance the type of the notice effect to be performed on the variable display of the symbol in accordance with the reserved lottery opportunity based on the result of the prior determination; When an effect execution trigger occurs, a background change effect in which the background image of the background effect being executed by the background effect executing means is changed to another background image upon execution of the new variable display by the symbol display means. When the background change effect is executed by the background change effect executing means and the background change effect executing means, the notice effect type pre-selecting means is selected. The notice effect type switching means for switching the determination of the type of the notice effect for the held lottery opportunity, and the notice effect effect switching by the notice effect type switching means at the time of the variable display regarding the reserved lottery opportunity by the symbol display means. When the type of the notice effect is switched, the type of the notice effect is selectively determined after selectively determining the type of the notice effect, while the type of the notice effect is not changed. In this case, the gaming machine further comprises: a notice effect content selecting unit that selectively determines the content of the notice effect based on the type of the notice effect determined by the notice effect type pre-selecting means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (a winning occurs at a start winning opening, and a game ball passes through a middle start gate or a right start gate), a predetermined lottery is performed. The predetermined lottery corresponds to, for example, a normal symbol lottery (operation lottery), a special symbol lottery (internal lottery), or the like. When this lottery opportunity occurs, a predetermined lottery is performed and the game proceeds.

(2) When the predetermined lottery of (1) is executed, the symbols (ordinary symbols and special symbols) are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. The It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until If the new lottery trigger (1) occurs while the symbol variation display is being executed, the lottery trigger is put on hold.

(3) The variation display effect using the effect symbol is executed within the variation time of (2) above, and the stop display effect using the effect symbol is executed within the stop display time of (2) above.

(4) In addition, a background effect (background effect) using a background image during a change display (change display effect) or a stop display (stop display effect) by the symbols (effect symbols) executed in (2) (and (3)) above. Stage (mode) production) is executed. Specifically, a coast stage (mode) effect using a background image with the coast as a motif and an indoor stage (mode) effect using a background image with the room as a motif are executed.

(5) In addition, during the variable display effect by the effect symbol executed in (3) above (within the variable time in (2) above), the result of the predetermined lottery in (1) corresponds to winning. A notice effect representing the expected degree of winning is executed.

(6) Start condition for starting the change display of the symbol (ordinary symbol or special symbol) in (2) above (eg normal if the normal symbol or special symbol is not changing and the previous change was made) When the lottery trigger of (1) above occurs when the symbol or special symbol stop display has been confirmed), a predetermined lottery (normal symbol lottery, special Symbol lottery) is executed, and the variable display of the symbol (2) (normal symbol or special symbol) is started.

(7) In contrast to (6) above, when the start condition for starting the variable display of the symbol (2) (normal symbol or special symbol) is not satisfied, When it occurs, the result of a predetermined lottery (normal symbol lottery, special symbol lottery) is determined in advance. In other words, it indicates that it is determined whether or not the lottery result has been won once when the lottery opportunity has occurred, and the lottery is performed when the symbol change display is started. Here, the variation display of the symbol executed in response to the reserved lottery opportunity is the variation, and the variation display of the symbol executed before the variation is the previous variation.

(8) If a predetermined condition is satisfied, the type (category) of the main notice effect to be executed in the change is determined using the result (whether or not won) obtained by the prior determination in (7) above. Is done. The category of the notice effect represents the category of the effect (notice effect) indicating the expected degree of winning. For example, as a category of the notice effect, a step-up notice effect in which the image changes step by step from the first stage to a specified stage depending on the expected degree of winning, a dialogue notice effect in which the character emits a dialogue, or a pseudo-variation Quasi-continuous advance notice fluctuation that behaves as if the next fluctuation is started after the end of. One of the plurality of types of notice effect categories is selected as the main notice effect category. Here, the main notice effect represents a main notice effect that is executed for the purpose of attracting attention from the player when there are a plurality of notice effects that are executed within the variation.

(9) After the category of the main notice effect regarding the change is determined in (8) above, the stage effect in (4) may be changed before the change is started. That is, the background image may be changed. This changed effect is called a background change effect (stage change effect).

(10) When the stage change effect is executed according to (9), the main notice effect category related to the change determined in (8) is deleted, and the determination is invalid. Therefore, since the main notice effect category is not determined in the change, the notice effect related to the main notice effect category determined in (8) above is not executed.

(11) When the game progresses and the change starts, the detailed content of the main notice effect is determined based on the main notice effect category determined in (8) above. If the main notice effect category has been erased in (9) above, after the main notice effect category is selectively determined again (after switching to the new main notice effect category), the details of the main notice effect The content will be determined.

  In this way, the category of the notice effect is determined in advance at the time of acquisition, and even if the stage change effect is executed before the change starts, the notice effect category determined in advance at the stage change effect is deleted. And by determining again at the time of the change, it is possible to avoid inconsistency between the notice effect and the stage. Therefore, even if the stage change effect is executed, the content of the notice effect and the content of the stage effect can be unified, so that it is possible to prevent providing an effect that confuses the player, and Can be suppressed.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variation pattern determining unit that determines at least a variation pattern related to setting of a variation time and a symbol display unit in the solution unit 1 when the symbol display is performed by the symbol display unit. When the symbol display is performed, the symbol display means displays the symbol in a stop display mode after executing a variable display effect that variably displays a plurality of effect symbols corresponding to the symbol variation display within the variation time. Along with a lottery element necessary for executing the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means in association with the occurrence of the lottery trigger, the symbol effect execution means for executing the result display effect to stop and display a plurality of the effect symbols correspondingly Each variation pattern determining element necessary for determining the variation pattern by the variation pattern determining means is acquired and written in order. Element storage means, and when the start condition is satisfied, the lottery element and the variation pattern determination element are stored by the element storage means. Storage consumption means for consuming the symbols one by one in the order of storage and providing them to the lottery execution means and the variation pattern determination means, respectively, wherein the lottery opportunity holding means is a variation of the symbol by the symbol display means When a new lottery trigger occurs in a state where the start condition for starting display is not satisfied, the lottery element and the variation pattern determination element relating to the new lottery trigger stored by the element storage unit are displayed. , The lottery opportunity is suspended by storing until it is provided by each of the storage consumption means, If the newly acquired lottery element and the variation pattern determining element are respectively stored by the element storage means in association with the occurrence of the new lottery opportunity when the starting condition is not satisfied, the storage The predetermined display executed by the lottery execution means using the lottery element stored in the element storage means for the variable display of symbols according to the reserved lottery opportunity consumed and executed by the consumption means The lottery result is determined in advance, and the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit is determined in advance using the variation pattern determination element stored in the element storage unit. The selection unit is configured to satisfy the predetermined condition and to perform the predetermined lottery regarding the lottery opportunity held by the prior determination unit. When the result of the preliminary determination of the selection and the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern are obtained, the display of the variation of the symbol corresponding to the lottery opportunity held based on the obtained result of the preliminary determination is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the type of the notice effect when it is executed is selectively determined in advance.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the following configuration and features are added to the solving means 1.

(1 ') When the lottery trigger of (1) occurs, a lottery element (big hit decision random number) necessary for executing the predetermined lottery of (2) is acquired. Therefore, in order to execute a predetermined lottery, a lottery opportunity must be generated as a premise. For this reason, the player plays a game with the initial goal being the occurrence of a prize at the start prize opening that becomes the lottery opportunity and the passing of the game ball through the middle start gate and the right start gate. A lottery opportunity occurs randomly (or accidentally or randomly), and when a lottery opportunity occurs randomly, a lottery element is acquired each time. Accompanying the acquisition of the lottery element, a variation pattern determining element (variation pattern determining random number) for determining which one to select from among a plurality of defined variation patterns is acquired. The variation pattern determination element is an element that determines the variation display mode of the special symbol. Here, the acquired lottery elements (and variation pattern determining elements) are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit (for example, four for each special symbol corresponding to each start winning award) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit. (The lottery element and the variation pattern determining element may be stored in the same storage area or may be stored in different storage areas, but are stored in association with each other.)

(6 ′) In the specific processing in (6) above, when the lottery element is acquired by (1 ′) above and the start condition for starting the variable display of the symbol (ordinary symbol or special symbol) is satisfied, The stored lottery elements are consumed in the stored order, and a predetermined lottery (normal symbol lottery, special symbol lottery) is executed.

(7 ′) Specifically, in the specific processing in (7) above, when the lottery trigger occurs and the lottery element and the variation pattern determination element are acquired, the lottery result is used in advance at the time of acquisition. Judgment is made. Therefore, the result of the lottery regarding the variation display of the symbol of the variation which is consumed and executed is determined at the time of acquisition (whether or not it is won and the variation pattern is determined). .

(8 ′) The specific processing in (8) above is the main process executed in the change using the result (whether or not won and the change pattern) obtained by the prior determination in (7 ′). The category of the notice effect is determined. Here, the predetermined condition is, for example, when there is no possibility that the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in advance is shortened, or when the current gaming state is a time shortened state (variation time is shortened, etc. The situation is not applicable.

  Thus, even if the category of the notice effect is determined in advance based on the fluctuation pattern at the time of acquisition and the stage change effect is executed before the change starts, the notice decided in advance at the stage change effect By deleting the effect category and determining again at the time of the change, the inconsistency between the notice effect and the stage can be avoided. Therefore, even if the stage change effect is executed, the content of the notice effect and the content of the stage effect can be unified, so that it is possible to prevent providing an effect that confuses the player, and Can be suppressed.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine according to the present invention executes the background effect for the type of the notice effect that is selectively determined by the notice effect type pre-selecting means or the notice effect content selecting means in the solution means 1 or 2. A notice effect type defining means for predefining a plurality of types of notice effects including a type of background specific notice effect corresponding to the background effect executed by means and a type of normal notice effect not corresponding to the background effect; The notice effect type switching means, when the type of the background-specific notice effect specified in the notice effect type specifying means is determined by the notice effect type pre-selecting means, the notice effect type pre-selection Switching that the type of the notice effect related to the reserved lottery opportunity has been determined by the means, and the communication specified in the notice effect type defining means When the type of the notice effect is determined by the notice effect type pre-selecting means, it is not switched that the kind of the notice effect related to the reserved lottery opportunity is determined by the notice effect type pre-selecting means. It is a gaming machine to play.

  With the above configuration, the category of the main notice effect determined in the above (8) is determined as either a specific notice effect category specific to the stage or a normal notice effect category not related to the stage. Represents. Further, the main notice effect category that is deleted in the above (11) is a specific notice effect category specific to the stage, and it is not deleted if the normal notice effect category not related to the stage is selected. Represents.

  As described above, even if the stage change effect is executed, it is not erased if the previously determined item is the normal notice effect category not related to the stage. Therefore, since it is not deleted, it means that the main notice effect category is not selected again, and the burden on the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine of the present invention selectively selects whether or not to execute the background change effect at the time of the new change display or stop display by the symbol display means in any of the solution means 1 to 3. When the background change effect execution selecting means and the background change effect execution selecting means determine to execute the background change effect, any one of a plurality of pre-defined background images is selectively selected. A background image selecting means for determining the background change effect executing means, and the background change effect executing means determines that the predetermined effect execution trigger has occurred when the background image is determined by the background image selecting means. It is a gaming machine characterized by executing a production.

  In the case of the above configuration, the stage change effect according to (9) is first determined whether or not to be executed, and then one of a plurality of types of background images is selected, and the selected background image is changed. Will be executed.

  In this way, by predefining a plurality of types of stages, it is possible to widen the range of effects, and to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Solving means 5: The gaming machine of the present invention, in the solving means 4, when the type of the notice effect related to the lottery opportunity reserved in the notice effect type pre-selecting means is determined in advance, the element storage means Using the period in which the lottery element and the variation pattern determination element relating to the reserved lottery opportunity are present, the destination determination effect that reflects the result regarding the reserved lottery opportunity obtained by the prior determination unit If the determination to execute the destination determination effect is made by the destination determination effect selection means and the destination determination effect selection means, the contents of the destination determination effect are selectively determined. And a destination determination effect execution means for executing the destination determination effect related to the reserved lottery opportunity based on the determined content, and the background change effect execution selection means When the destination determining effects by constant demonstration execution unit is not running, a game machine, characterized by selectively determine whether to execute the effect the background changes.

  In the case of the above configuration, the period until the change is started is used by using the result (whether or not it has been won and the change pattern) regarding the change obtained by the prior determination in (7) above. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute a predetermination effect (prefetching effect) related to the change. Then, when it is determined to execute the predetermination effect (prefetching effect) regarding the change, the content of the prefetching effect is determined, and the prefetching effect is executed until the change is started based on the content. While the destination determination effect is being executed, the stage change effect (9) is not executed.

  Accordingly, the stage change effect is not executed when the predetermined effect, which is a special effect, is executed, so the main notice effect category is not deleted. Therefore, since it is not deleted, it means that the main notice effect category is not selected again, the burden on the gaming machine can be reduced, and the range of the effect is expanded by executing the first determination effect. You can also

  Solving means 6: The gaming machine of the present invention is characterized in that, in the solving means 5, when the content of the notice effect is selected by the notice effect content selecting means, the destination determination effect relating to the lottery opportunity held by the destination determination effect executing means. Is executed, the notice effect type changing means for changing the kind of the notice effect to the same kind as the kind of the notice effect related to the reserved lottery opportunity determined by the notice effect type pre-selecting means is further provided. It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  If it is said structure, since the notice effect category performed during the pre-decision effect in the said solution means 5 is unified, a player can have a great sense of expectation for winning, and a decrease in the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Solving means 7: The gaming machine of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 4 to 6, wherein the background change effect execution selecting means executes the background effect after the background change effect is executed by the background change effect executing means. The game machine is characterized in that when the variable display effect by the execution means is executed a predetermined number of times, the type of the notice effect related to the reserved lottery opportunity is selectively determined in advance.

  With the above configuration, once the stage change effect according to (9) is executed, the stage change effect is not executed unless a predetermined number of changes are executed. Therefore, since stage change effects are not frequently executed, it is not necessary to give the player bothersomeness due to stage change effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. Also, since stage change effects are not frequently executed, processing such as deleting the main notice effect category determined in advance regarding the change or determining the main notice effect again at the time of the change is not executed. The burden can be reduced.

  Solution 8: In the gaming machine of the present invention, in any one of Solution 1 to 7, when the type of the notice effect related to the reserved lottery opportunity is selectively determined by the notice effect type pre-selection means, An amusement machine characterized by further comprising an effect content pre-selecting means for selectively determining in advance the content of the effect performed during the variation display of the symbol according to the reserved lottery opportunity.

  If it is said structure, the content of the effect performed in the said fluctuation | variation will be determined using the result (whether it was elected and fluctuation pattern) regarding the said fluctuation | variation obtained by the prior determination of said (7). The For example, the combination (3) of the effect symbols in the stop display effect (so-called stop appearance) is determined, whether or not the reach effect is executed during the change, the contents of the reach effect (special Including reach production).

  In this way, in order to determine the stop event of the change in advance, by executing the notice effect or the pre-reading effect of the contents related to the stop event, more information (here, the change is executed) , The content related to the stop appearance of the production symbol) can be provided to the player, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Solution 9: The gaming machine according to the present invention provides the game machine according to any one of the solutions 2 to 8, when the variation pattern obtained by the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination unit satisfies a reach generation condition. Based on the variation pattern obtained in the previous determination, the contents of the reach effect performed during the execution of the variation display effect executed by the symbol effect execution means in the symbol variation display according to the reserved lottery opportunity When the background change effect is executed by the reach effect content pre-selecting means and the background change effect execution means, the reserved lottery opportunity determined by the reach effect content pre-selecting means is determined. Reach effect content erasing means for erasing the content of the reach effect relating to the variable display related to the reserved lottery opportunity by the symbol effect executing means When the content of the reach effect is erased by the reach effect content erasing means, the reach effect is executed after selectively determining the content of the reach effect, and the content of the reach effect. And a reach effect executing means for executing the reach effect based on the content of the reach effect determined by the reach effect content pre-selecting means.

  With the above configuration, the reach effect may be executed during the fluctuating display effect or the stop display effect by the effect symbol executed in (3), and the reach effect is also the same as the main notice effect category. Determined in advance. Further, when the stage change effect is executed, the reach effect is also deleted as in the main notice effect category. Therefore, if the determined reach effect is deleted at the time of the change, it is determined again in the same manner as the main notice effect category.

  Thus, the reach effect and stage inconsistency can be avoided for the reach effect without being limited to the main notice effect category. Therefore, even if the stage change effect is executed, the contents of the reach effect and the content of the stage effect can be unified, so that it is possible to prevent providing an effect that confuses the player. Can be suppressed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a security management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production effect determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a hit prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern content corresponding table. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a normal symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol change pre-process. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (used when the number of working memories = 0). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (used when the number of working memories = 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of detachment (used when the number of working memories = 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (used when the number of working memories = 3). It is a figure which shows an example of a hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the indefinite value fixed value corresponding table according to prefetch fluctuation pattern number. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable start prize-winning apparatus management process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a normal symbol operation condition setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game by a pachinko machine as an example. FIG. 49 is a game flow diagram showing a game flow when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero. It is a conceptual diagram which classify | categorizes and shows the pattern of a game flow. It is a conceptual diagram which classify | categorizes and shows the pattern of a game flow. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of normal symbol non-winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the design of the symbol sequence which comprises an effect symbol. It is a continuation figure showing an example of an effect performed at the time of hitting a normal symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching effect and step-up notice effect performed over a several times of fluctuation | variation (1/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the prefetch effect and step-up notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (2/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching effect and step-up notice effect performed over several times of fluctuation | variation (3/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching effect and step-up notice effect performed over a several times of fluctuation | variation (4/10). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of an effect regarding the prefetching effect and step-up notice effect performed over several times of fluctuations (5/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the effect regarding the prefetch effect and step-up notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (6/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the look-ahead effect and step-up notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (7/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching effect and step-up notice effect performed over a several times of fluctuation | variation (8/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the prefetch effect and step-up notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (9/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the look-ahead effect and step-up notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (10/10). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the look-ahead effect and dialogue notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (1/9). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching production | presentation and dialogue notice production | presentation performed over a several times of fluctuation | variation (2/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetch production | presentation and dialog notice production | presentation performed over several fluctuations (3/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching production | presentation and dialogue notice production | presentation performed over several times of fluctuations (4/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the prefetching effect and dialogue notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (5/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching production | presentation and dialogue notice production | presentation performed over several times of fluctuations (6/9). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the production | presentation regarding the prefetching production | presentation and dialog notice production | presentation performed over several times of fluctuation | variation (7/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the prefetching effect and dialogue notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (8/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect about the look-ahead effect and dialogue notice effect performed over a plurality of times of change (9/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the effect of the notice effect performed when a background image is changed. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the effect of the notice effect performed when a background image is changed (2/4). It is a continuation figure (3/4) which shows the example of the effect of the notice effect performed when a background image is changed. It is a continuation figure (4/4) which shows the example of the effect of the notice effect performed when a background image is changed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed at the time of variable start prize-winning apparatus action | operation. It is a continuation figure (1/2) which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of special symbol change (within change time). It is a continuation figure (2/2) which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of special symbol change (within change time). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production performed at the time of special symbol change when not entering the chance zone. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed when a game flow progresses during a probability change from variable winning apparatus operation. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed when the limiter addition by the normal win during probability change generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect performed after reaching a limiter. It is the figure which showed the example of the background image which changes with progress of a game flow. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect performed when it does not re-enter into a chance zone after reaching a limiter (when returning during a normal game). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol operation | movement memory production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol prefetch effect selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a prefetch effect scenario selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the main notice effect category selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a hit | time variation effect pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect scenario selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an advance selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the main notice effect category setting process at the time of non-prefetching effect execution. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a stage change effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a stage change effect selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the aftereffects management process of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the stage change effect setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the stage change effect setting process in 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Further, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower tray ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the like are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (no reference symbol).

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or for example, while the symbol (ordinary symbol or special symbol) is changing, Various effects (notice effect, expectation suggestion effect, etc.) can be generated in accordance with various situations such as a fixed display per normal symbol and a game in a high probability state.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 5).

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration of the board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. Further, in the game area 8a, the middle start gate 20, the right start gate 21, the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 and the like are distributed around the effect unit 40. ing. Among these, the middle start gate 20 is located in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a, and the right start gate 21 is located near the upper part in the right part of the game area 8a. In addition, the three normal winning holes 22 are positioned on the lower side of the left side of the game area 8a, and the other one normal winning hole 24 is positioned below the middle start gate 20. The remaining ordinary winning opening 25 is located on the right side of the game area 8a, and is located below the right start gate 21, and the variable winning device 30 is arranged directly below the right starting gate 21. The variable start winning device 28 is located on the lower side of the right side of the game area 8a and is arranged side by side to the right of the middle start gate 20.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 in the process of flowing down, enters the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25 (wins), or The player enters (wins) a ball in the variable start winning device 28 during operation or the variable winning device 30 during opening operation. Note that the game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8a may pass through the middle start gate 20 or may enter the normal winning holes 22 and 24 (win). The game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the right start gate 21, enter the normal winning opening 25 (win), or operate the variable start winning device 28 and the opening operation. There is a possibility of winning (winning) a ball in the variable winning device 30 at the time. The game balls that have passed through the middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but enter the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 (winning) The collected game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. A ball can be entered (winning) into the start winning opening 28a (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the start winning opening 28a (the starting winning opening 28a is closed). When the variable start winning device 28 is actuated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the start winning port 28a (open state). During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, that is, in an open state in which it is possible to enter a ball, and can generate an event (lottery opportunity) of winning in the start winning port 28a (variable winning). means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 28a. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation, but the flow is generated randomly.

  The variable winning device 30 operates when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for the specified stop display time in a mode other than non-winning) and enters the big winning opening 30b. Enables a ball (winning) (special electric accessory). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 30a, and these opening / closing members 30a also reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 30a are in the closed position with their tips facing upwards, and at this time, it is impossible to enter (win) the big winning opening 30b (game). (There is no gap through which the sphere can flow). On the other hand, when the variable winning device 30 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 30a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged to the left and right to open the large winning opening 30b. During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which game balls can flow in, and can generate a winning (winning) to the big winning opening 30b (variable winning means). Here, similarly, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable winning device 30 (the large winning opening 30b at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily flow into the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) at the time of the opening operation, and the inflow is generated randomly.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the game areas 8a including the game balls that have entered the normal winning holes 22, 24, 25, the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a), and the variable winning device 30 (large winning port 30b) are driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower right position in the window 4a, and a special symbol display device 34 and a game state display device 38. ing. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). The display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  Further, the special symbol display device 34 can display the variation state and the stopped state of the special symbol by, for example, a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means). Since one special symbol is used in this embodiment, it is sufficient to provide one 7-segment LED as the special symbol display device 34. However, as shown in FIG. By mounting, the same hardware configuration (integrated display substrate 89) can be applied to other models using two special symbols. In the present embodiment, the working memory lamp and the working memory number display device corresponding to the special symbol are not provided. One special symbol may be displayed by two 7-segment LEDs. In addition, the special symbol display device 34 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  The game state display device 38 includes, for example, three LEDs corresponding to a high probability state display lamp 38c, a time-short state display lamp 38d, and a launch position designation display lamp 38e. In FIG. 4, other lamps (LEDs) not particularly denoted by reference numerals are unused (blank). In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, and the game state display device 38 described above are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89. It is attached.

[Other configuration of game board unit: see FIG. 3]
The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, 40m, and the like inside. The decorative parts 40b, 40c, 40k, and 40m improve the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling and, for example, emit transmitted light by a built-in light emitter (LED or the like), thereby performing a stunning operation. can do. A liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The rolling stage 40e is formed, for example, in two upper and lower stages, of which the upper stage is located at the back as viewed from the player and the lower stage is located at the front as viewed from the player. In both the upper and lower stages, the upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that rolls on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down from the lower stage into the lower game area 8a.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the upper rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is opened toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the middle start gate 20. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is released from the ball discharge port 40h and easily passes through the middle start gate 20 directly below it (however, it does not always pass). .)

  In addition, the effect unit 40 is provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, and the like) (not shown) together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) for effect. The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to such an effect using the movable body 40f, an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image can be exhibited. A production example using the movable body 40f will be described later.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The middle start gate 20 and the right start gate 21 described above are integrally provided with a middle gate switch 78 and a right gate switch 80 for detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. In addition, the game board unit 8 is provided with a start winning port switch 82 (detection means) and a count switch 84 (detection means) corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. Among these, the start winning port switch 82 is for detecting a winning of a game ball to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening 30b) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning port switch 86 for detecting a winning of a game ball to the normal winning ports 22, 24, 25. In addition, a common winning opening switch 86 may be used for all the normal winning openings 22, 24, and 26, or separate winning opening switches 86 may be provided for the normal winning openings 22, 24, and 25, respectively. Good. For example, separate winning port switches 86 are installed on the left and right and center of the board, respectively, and the left winning port switch 86 detects the winning of a game ball with respect to the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and the center winning port switch In 86, the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 24 located in the center of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, the winning of the game ball to the normal winning port 25 located on the right side of the board is detected. Good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, the winning board detection signal from the middle gate switch 78, the right gate switch 80, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87 due to the configuration of the game board unit 8. It has become a thing. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The display operation of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, and the game state display device 38 described above is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, and 38 and the lamp 33a in accordance with the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, and 38 and the lamp 33a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on the single integrated display substrate 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to operate (open) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  Although not specifically shown, the game board unit 8 is also provided with a magnetic sensor and a vibration sensor. Among these sensors, the magnetic sensor detects a magnetic flux flying to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and A detection signal corresponding to the density (magnetic intensity) is output. The vibration sensor detects an acceleration (vibration) applied to the game board unit 8 at the installation position, and outputs a detection signal corresponding to the magnitude. The detection signals of these magnetic sensors and vibration sensors are input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) through the panel relay terminal board 87, for example.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 126 can be of a type that is faster (high clock frequency) than the main control CPU 72 and has a wide data bus width (for example, 64 bits). The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives a command to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134, and various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 and the board surface. Processing is performed to cause the lamp 53 to emit light or to actually output sound effects, voices, or the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. , 48, 50, 52 and speakers 54, 55, 56. In addition, the above-described effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame electric decoration board 136, and when the player pushes or rotates the effect switching button 45, a contact signal (during the push operation) or a rotation angle signal ( (At the time of rotation operation) is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame lighting board 136.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body solenoid 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body solenoid 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body solenoid 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen through the substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 is visible. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. When an LED array is used for the backlight, an LED drive board (not shown) can be installed instead of the inverter board 158. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, and 56, and the movable body 40f as described above, and the production by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. Control is included. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and each pixel (for example, 24-bit color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. ) Individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a command for returning to the effect control device 124 (for example, a model designation command, a time shortening state designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a normal symbol operation memory count command, a remaining number cut counter remaining number). Command, special gaming state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state that was being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown (for example, the effect state corresponding to the time reduction state, the effect state corresponding to the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, and the operation It is possible to restore the production display mode of the stored number, the sound output content, the light emission state of various lamps, and the like.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, Time reduction function operation / non-operation state, jackpot gaming state / non-hit gaming state, operation memory content, various flag states, random number update state, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in supply voltage). When the power shutoff occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special winning opening solenoid 90, and the entire area excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Back up the contents and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a winning symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach group) excluding a bonus symbol random number (hardware random number) corresponding to a special symbol and a winning symbol random (hardware random number) corresponding to a normal symbol. (Determined random number, reach mode determined random number, variation pattern determined random number, etc.) are generated on the program. Note that the reach group determination random number and the reach mode determination random number corresponding to the special symbol can be generated as necessary, and if not used, the random number generation process can be omitted. In any case, these software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 8), but each time the random number value makes one round in this process, the loop counter The initial value (not all random numbers need to be targeted) is changed. The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 8), and therefore overlap (conflict) ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) ( For example, it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 8). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the random number counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the detection signal from the middle gate switch 78 and the right gate switch 80 and the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the start winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86 are read. .

  Step S204: Here, the main control CPU 72 executes a security management process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not to treat the ball as valid based on the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal read in the previous input processing (step S203) (the winning is valid). Whether or not there is) is determined (winning validity determination means). When the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning is valid, the main control CPU 72 retains a winning detection signal. However, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning is invalid, the main control CPU 72 generates an illegal winning error command or due to an illegal winning. The bit of the winning detection signal is rewritten from ON to OFF. In the security management process, the main control CPU 72 monitors for illegal acts by the above magnetic sensor and vibration sensor (not shown), and excessive winning or passing through the middle start gate 20 or the right start gate 21 occurs. It is determined whether or not. The details of the security management process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S205: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, events that occurred during the game based on the passage detection signal from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 and the winning detection signal from the start winning opening switch 82 And further processing is executed in accordance with each event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the start winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as an internal lottery trigger (lottery trigger) corresponding to the special symbol has occurred. When a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that becomes a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when the passage detection signal is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 and the processing executed when the winning detection signal is input from the start winning port switch 82 are further different. This will be described later with reference to the flowchart.

  Step S206, Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the special symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol described above, controls the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 34, The operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S207), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the middle start gate 20 or the right start gate 21 in the previous switch input event process (step S205). In the normal symbol game process, a random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (lottery trigger generation operation means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display. The details of the normal symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the number of prize balls is output to the payout control device 92. .

  Step S209: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be tabulated and managed (however, in this embodiment, the small hit is not used). Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S211: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting state of the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the special symbol display device 34, the game state display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S206) or the normal symbol game process (step S207). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S209) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes effect control output processing. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S214: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of step S206 to step S213 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are incorporated and executed in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S215: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S216, Step S217: The main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Security management processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the security management process executed in the interrupt management process. The contents of the security management process will be described below along with an example procedure.

  Step S220: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a winning validity determination process. In this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the winning is valid for the case where the input state of the winning detection signal read in the previous input process is “ON” (winning validity determining means). The validity determination is made for each of the start winning opening 28a and the big winning opening 30b.

[Significance of “entering ball” and “winning”]
Here, the meaning of “entering ball” and “winning” in the present embodiment will be described.
With respect to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, each “open ball” means that the game ball flows into the start winning port 28a or the big winning port 30b in an open state.

  When the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the through hole (detection unit) of the start winning opening switch 82 or the count switch 84, the winning detection signal of each switch 82, 84 is turned "ON", and the starting winning opening 28a or large This means that “entering ball” into the winning opening 30b is detected.

  However, some detected “entrance balls” are not appropriate. As an example in which the detected “pitch” is not appropriate, there is a case where a game ball flows into the variable start winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30 by some unauthorized means. For this reason, in the winning validity determination process (step S220), it is determined whether or not the detected “entering ball” is treated as effective for security.

  Then, when the main control CPU 72 determines in the winning validity determination process that the “winning” is treated as valid, the “winning” is generated for the first time, and the winning detection signals of the switches 82 and 84 are the following. It is still used as effective in the control process. On the other hand, if “entry” is detected, but the main control CPU 72 determines that the “entry” is not treated as valid (invalid), no “winning” has occurred in the first place. . In this case, the winning detection signals of the switches 82 and 84 are invalidated and are not used for subsequent control processing (lottery or prize ball processing).

  In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, “determining that the detected“ pick ”” is treated as valid ”in the winning validity determination process is also expressed as“ determining that the winning is valid ”, and“ detected “ “Determining that“ entering ball ”is not treated as valid” is also expressed as “determining that the winning is invalid (invalid)”.

[Judgment conditions]
In the winning validity determination process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the following conditions.

[Effectiveness determination for the start winning award 28a]
(1) To the start winning port 28a detected during a series of operations related to the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) and during a period other than a period until a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds at the longest) elapses after the operation ends. It ’s not a ball.

[Validity determination for the big prize opening 30b]
(2) Entering the prize winning opening 30b detected during a series of operations related to the variable prize winning device 30 (special electric accessory) and during a period other than a period until a predetermined time (for example, about 15 seconds) elapses after the operation ends. It must not be a sphere.

  In the determination using the above condition (1), for example, the value of the normal game management status and the values of various winning valid timers are obtained in the interruption period in which the winning detection signal (ON) from the start winning opening switch 82 is input. Can be done with reference. When the condition (1) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the “winning” to the start winning opening 28a is treated as valid, and the winning detection signal from the start winning opening switch 82 is also valid in the subsequent control processing. Used for. On the other hand, when the condition (1) is not satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the ball entering the start winning port 28a is not treated as valid, and performs a process of invalidating the winning detection signal from the start winning port switch 82. Do. The normal game management status is internal information that is set on the control by the main control CPU 72 in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the normal symbol. The value of the winning valid timer is set in consideration of stagnation of the game ball (so-called ball biting) after the closing time of the variable start winning device 28 has elapsed (for example, about 2 to 4 seconds).

  The determination using the condition (2) is performed with reference to the value of the special game management status or the value of the winning valid timer in the interruption cycle in which the winning detection signal (ON) from the count switch 84 is input, for example. be able to. When the condition (2) is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the “winning” to the big winning opening 30b is treated as valid and effectively uses the winning detection signal from the count switch 84 in the subsequent control processing. To do. On the other hand, when the condition (2) is not satisfied, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning ball 30b is not treated as valid and performs a process of invalidating the winning detection signal from the count switch 84. The special game management status is internal information that is set on the control by the main control CPU 72 in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol. The winning valid timer here is also set in consideration of the ball biting after the closing time of the variable winning device 30 has elapsed (for example, about 2 to 4 seconds).

  In the process of invalidating the winning detection signal, determination is made for each of the conditions (1) and (2) for each interrupt cycle, and the value of the invalid winning counter is incremented each time the winning detection signal is invalidated. When the value of the invalid prize counter reaches a specified value (for example, five) for each condition (1) and (2), the main control CPU 72 turns the illegal prize error flag ON (= 1) as internal information. As a result, an “illegal prize error” occurs in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S222: When the above winning validity determination process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then executes a magnetic detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not there is an illegal act (so-called “magnet goto”) based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor (not shown). As a result, when a magnetic flux corresponding to an illegal act is detected, the main control CPU 72 sets the security error flag to ON (= 1). As a result, another “security error” occurs in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes vibration detection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not there is an illegal act (so-called “drilling”) based on a detection signal from the vibration sensor (not shown). As a result, when a vibration that is recognized as an illegal act is detected, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S226: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a winning excess detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning occurrences per fixed time (for example, 1 minute), and determines whether or not an excessive winning amount equivalent to an illegal act has occurred. If it is determined that the winning is exceeded, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S228: The main control CPU 72 executes a passage excess detection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of occurrences of passage of the start gate 20 per fixed time (for example, 1 minute), and determines whether or not an excess corresponding to an illegal act has occurred. If it is determined that it exceeds the limit, the main control CPU 72 also turns on the security error flag.

  Step S230: The main control CPU 72 checks the values of the “illegal prize error flag” and the “security error flag”. When any error flag is set to ON (= 1) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S232. If none of the error flags is set to ON (No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S232.

  Step S232: In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes error command processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates an error command (error state designation command) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126), and transfers the value to the command transmission buffer. The error command can set a different value for each error that has occurred. For example, when the “illegal prize error flag” is ON, a value that can be identified as “illegal prize error” is set in the error command, and when the “security error flag” is ON, a value that can be identified as “security error”. Set to error command. The error command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 11).

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an illegal winning mask process here. In this process, the main control CPU 72 rewrites all the winning detection signals determined to be invalid from ON to OFF, regardless of whether or not it is determined that the illegal winning error is determined in the previous winning validity determination process (step S220). As a result, the winning detection signal is treated as “OFF (no winning has been generated)” within the same interruption period, and the special symbol change, winning ball payout, etc. are not performed.
When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process.

[Switch input event processing]
Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S205 in FIG. 8). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 and executes a special symbol storing process. The specific contents of the special symbol storage process (step S11) will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

  Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the middle gate switch 78 or the right gate switch 80 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. Specific contents of the normal symbol memory update process (step S16) will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[Normal symbol memory update processing]
Next, the normal symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol storage update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the normal symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S20: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the normal symbol operating memory number counter to check whether or not the operating memory number is less than the maximum value of 4. The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of random numbers determined per ordinary symbol stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 1 byte each) for the normal symbols, and one random number determined per normal symbol can be stored in each section. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter reaches the upper limit value (maximum value) (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the upper limit value (maximum value) (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21.

  Step S21: The main control CPU 72 adds one normal symbol operation memory number. The normal symbol operation memory number counter is stored in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, for example, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is controlled by the display output management process (step S211 in FIG. 8).

  Step S22: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 described above. The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 has a data bus width of 8 bits, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the designated address, it saves it as the determined random number per ordinary symbol in the address of the transfer destination (random number storage area). Note that the determined random number value per symbol may be acquired from the hit random number counter area of the RAM 76, for example. In this case, when the main control CPU 72 reads the determined random number value per ordinary symbol from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a per-decided random number corresponding to the ordinary symbol.

  Step S23: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially obtains the normal symbol reach determination random number and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number from the random number counter area for variation of the RAM 76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the normal symbol (lottery element storage means) , Acquisition of variation pattern determining factors). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 obtains the normal symbol reach determination random number and the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S24: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved determined random number per normal symbol, the normal symbol reach determination random number, and the normal symbol variation pattern determining random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the normal symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S26: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a time reduction state (a state in which the time reduction function is activated). If the time shortening function is not activated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following step S27. If the time reduction function is in operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S27 and proceeds to step S28. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the time reduction function operation. This is because the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency particularly during the time reduction function operation. In addition, during the time shortening function, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol winning probability is high (for example, low probability is about 1/99 to about 98/99). , Since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, the set time (about 5 to 60 seconds) is shortened to about 0.6 seconds at the time of non-operation), the game ball is fired for a long time (the normal symbol working memory is It is hard to be interrupted for a period of time until the variable start winning device 28 is stopped and the operation is stopped (so-called electric chew support).

  Step S27: When the current game management state (internal state) is other than the big hit and the time reduction function is not activated (step S26: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an acquisition-time effect determination process for the normal symbol. This process is performed in advance (before the start of variation) and results of the internal lottery and the variation pattern lottery based on the normal symbol determined random number and the normal symbol variation pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S22 and S23. Is to determine (so-called “look ahead”).

  The result of the internal lottery obtained in this process is unchanged (the determination result in this process is the same as the result in the normal symbol fluctuation pre-process), but the determination of the fluctuation pattern is changed. There is. That is, the actual variation may not be executed based on the variation pattern determined in the acquisition effect determination process (the value of the prefetch variation pattern number and the variation pattern number may be different). This is because the fluctuation pattern number is determined based on the number of working memories (0 to 3) at the time of the fluctuation, so that the pre-reading fluctuation pattern number determined on the assumption that the number of working memories is zero May be different. Therefore, even if the prefetch fluctuation pattern number obtained by this processing is 5, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern number obtained at the time of the fluctuation is 2. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery obtained by this process is unchanged, while the result of the variation pattern lottery may be changed.

  The main control CPU 72 generates a result determined in this process as a command. For example, the internal lottery predetermination result is generated as a normal symbol prefetching information command, and the variation pattern lottery predetermination result is generated as a normal symbol prefetching variation pattern command. The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S28: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the normal symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BEH”) representing the command type, the number of working memories after the increase (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte to be a one word length A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BEH” is a value indicating that the current production command is a working memory number command for a normal symbol.

  Step S29: The main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol effect command output setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 receives the normal symbol look-ahead variation pattern command generated in the previous step S27, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S28, the start signal control command for the normal symbol, etc. Set to send to.

  When the above procedure is completed or the normal symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (maximum value) (step S20: Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
Next, details of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (step S27 in FIG. 11) executed during the normal symbol memory update process will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S70: The main control CPU 72 refers to the determined random number per symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the random number storage area of the RAM 76 and refers to the value of the random number determined per normal symbol of various normal symbol random numbers stored as a set in the previous step S24. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit confirmation process (pre-reading operation lottery). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of normal symbol values and confirms whether or not the determined random value per normal symbol referred to in the previous step S70 is included in this range. In this embodiment, the hit value range is set on the program and hit determination is performed. However, the hit determination table is written in the ROM 74 in advance, and the hit determination is read and compared with the random number value. There are also programming examples. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 generates a normal symbol prefetch information command. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates a normal symbol prefetch information command based on the result of the hit determination confirmed in the previous step S72. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S76.

  Step S76: The main control CPU 72 refers to the normal symbol variation random number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the random number storage area of the RAM 76, and refers to the value of the random number for normal symbol variation of the various random numbers of the normal symbol set and stored in the previous step S24. For example, the value of a normal symbol variation pattern determination random number is referred to. Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to step S78.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the previous determination result is a win. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the result of the hit determination confirmed in the previous step S72 is hit. If the result of this confirmation is that the previous determination result is a win (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S80. On the other hand, when the result of the previous determination is not successful (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S82.

  Step S80: The main control CPU 72 refers to the hit prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to a hit prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table stored in advance in the ROM 74. Note that the contents of the specific selection table will be further described later with reference to specific examples. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S84.

  Step S82: The main control CPU 72 refers to the deviation prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the loss-ahead look-ahead variation pattern selection table stored in the ROM 74 in advance. Note that the contents of the specific selection table will be further described later with reference to specific examples. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S84.

  Step S84: The main control CPU 72 selects a prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 selects the prefetch variation pattern number based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number value referenced in the previous step S76 and the prefetch variation pattern selection table referenced in the previous step S80 or step S81. To decide. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S86.

  Step S86: The main control CPU 72 generates a normal symbol look-ahead variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates a normal symbol prefetch variation pattern command based on the prefetch variation pattern number determined in the previous step S84.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol memory update process (FIG. 11).

  Next, details of the look-ahead variation pattern selection process (step S84 in FIG. 12) executed during the acquisition effect determination process will be described. First, selection of a prefetch variation pattern when the result of the prejudgment corresponds to a deviation will be described.

[Look-ahead variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used when the result of the previous determination corresponds to a loss. In addition, this selection table has, for example, a structure in which “comparison value” and “prefetch variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time starting from the head address. Also, “variation pattern contents” having different contents are associated with each “prefetch variation pattern number”. Each “prefetch variation pattern number” is associated with a “prefetch variation pattern command” having a different command value.

  For example, the “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “151”, “181”, “201”, “221”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” “,” And “1” to “8” of “look-ahead variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  For example, the look-ahead variation pattern numbers “1” to “4” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, that is, the content of the variation pattern is “non-reach variation pattern 1” to “non-reduction variation”. This corresponds to “reach fluctuation pattern 4”. In addition, the read-ahead variation pattern numbers “5” to “8” correspond to variation patterns that are lost after reach, that is, the contents of the change patterns are “change variation pattern 5 after reach” to “shift after reach”. This corresponds to “variation pattern 8”. Note that the content of the specific variation pattern will be further described later with reference to a specific example.

  The main control CPU 72 compares the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number value referenced in the previous step S76 with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table in order, and if the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value. Then, the variation pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 changes the comparison value in order because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. The comparison value is compared, and the comparison value “201” is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “4” as the corresponding prefetch fluctuation pattern number.

  When the prefetch variation pattern number is determined, a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the prefetch variation pattern number is generated. For example, “B7H03H” including a MODE value “B7H” and an EVENT value “03H” is generated as a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the prefetch variation pattern number “4”. Here, the MODE value “B7H” indicates the result of the previous determination based on the normal symbol, and further indicates that the result is out of sync.

  Next, selection of the prefetch variation pattern when the result of the prejudgment is true will be described.

[Hook-up look-ahead variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit prefetch fluctuation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used when the result of the previous determination is a hit. In addition, this selection table has, for example, a structure in which “comparison value” and “prefetch variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time starting from the head address. Also, “variation pattern contents” having different contents are associated with each “prefetch variation pattern number”. Each “prefetch variation pattern number” is associated with a “prefetch variation pattern command” having a different command value.

  For example, the “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “151”, “181”, “201”, “221”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” ”And“ 13 ”to“ 20 ”of“ look-ahead variation pattern number ”are assigned to each“ comparison value ”.

  For example, the pre-reading variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” correspond to the variation pattern contents “reaching variation pattern after reach 13” to “displacement variation pattern 20 after reach” after reaching. Note that the content of the specific variation pattern will be further described later with reference to a specific example.

  The main control CPU 72 compares the normal symbol variation pattern determination random number value referenced in the previous step S76 with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table in order, and if the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value. Then, the variation pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the random value for determining the variation pattern at that time is “147”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 151 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding prefetch fluctuation pattern number. Then, “B9H01H” having a MODE value “B9H” and an EVENT value “01H” is generated as a prefetch fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the prefetch fluctuation pattern number “14”. Here, the MODE value “B9H” indicates the result of the previous determination based on the normal symbol, and further indicates that the result is a win.

[Change pattern correspondence table]
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between the variation pattern contents. Hereinafter, the correspondence between the contents of each variation pattern will be described.

  This variation pattern content correspondence table has, for example, a configuration of “variation pattern content”, “variation time”, “reach presence / absence”, and “special reach presence / absence” in order from the left column. Here, “variation time” represents the variation time for normal symbol variation display, “reach presence / absence” represents whether or not the normal reach effect is executed during the regular symbol variation display, and “special reach” “Yes / No” represents whether or not a special reach effect having a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than a normal reach effect is executed. The reach production and the special reach production include various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, story reach production and the like. For these reach effects, the effect display control device 144 (effect control CPU 126) determines which reach effect is executed in the effect control process. Therefore, the variation pattern number and the prefetch variation pattern number determined by the main control CPU 72 indicate whether or not to execute the reach effect or the special effect, and indicate that the detailed contents of the effect are not determined.

  For example, the variation pattern number “1” (other than “2” to “4”) is selected in the variation, and the variation pattern content “non-reach variation pattern 1” (“non-reach variation pattern” based on the variation pattern number is selected. When “variation pattern 2” to “non-reach variation pattern 4”) is executed, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 6 seconds (10 seconds to 20 seconds), during which the reach effect and the special reach effect are executed. It means not being done.

  For example, the variation pattern number “5” (in addition, “6”, “7”) is selected in the variation, and the variation pattern content “reaching variation pattern 5 after reach” (“reach” is selected based on the variation pattern number. When the deviation variation pattern 6 "and" the deviation variation pattern 7 after reach "are executed, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds (45 seconds, 60 seconds), during which reach effect is executed. This means that the special reach performance is not executed.

  For example, when the variation pattern number “8” is selected in the variation, and the variation pattern content “post-reach variation pattern 8” based on the variation pattern number is executed, the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed for 90 seconds. The reach effect and the special reach effect are executed during this period.

  For example, the variation pattern number “13” (in addition, “14” to “16”) is selected in the variation, and the variation pattern content “variation pattern after reach 13” (“reach” is selected based on the variation pattern number. When the rearward fluctuation pattern 14 "to the" reach after fluctuation pattern 16 ") is executed, the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed for 30 seconds (45 seconds to 75 seconds), during which the reach effect is executed. This means that the special reach performance is not executed.

  For example, the variation pattern number “17” (in addition, “18” to “20”) is selected in the variation, and the variation pattern content “variation pattern after reach 17” (“reach” is selected based on the variation pattern number. When the rearward fluctuation pattern 18 "to" reach after fluctuation pattern 20 ") is executed, the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed for 90 seconds (120 seconds to 180 seconds), during which the reach effect is executed. This means that the special reach performance is not executed.

[Normal design game processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol game process (step S207 in FIG. 8) executed during the interrupt management process will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the normal symbol game process. Normal symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1001), normal symbol variation pre-processing (step S2001), normal symbol variation processing (step S3001), normal symbol stop display processing (step S4001), variable start winning device management. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5001). First, the basic flow of the normal game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1001: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S2001 to S5001). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address and sets the end of the normal symbol game process in the “jump table” as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (the value of the normal game management status). For example, if the normal symbol has not yet started to be changed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol change pre-process (step S2001) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the normal symbol variation processing (step S3001) as the next jump destination, and if the normal symbol variation processing has been completed, For example, the normal symbol stop display process (step S4001) is selected as the jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2001: In the normal symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation for preparing conditions for starting the variation display of the regular symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3001: In the normal symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33 while counting the change timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each of the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 33. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a normal symbol variation display is performed. In this embodiment, since the two symbols are alternately lit and extinguished to perform normal symbol variation display, the drive signal pattern can be configured simply (for example, in two patterns), and the main control accordingly. The load on the CPU 72 can be reduced.

  Step S4001: In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the driving of the normal symbol display device 33. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each of the two LEDs, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a normal symbol stop display is performed. In the present embodiment, among the two upper and lower LEDs, for example, a stop display at the time of winning is performed with the upper LED lit, and a stop display at the time of non-winning is performed with the lower LED lit. Yes (upper and lower logic may be reversed).

  Step S5001: The variable start winning device management process is selected when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning manner (for example, the upper LED is lit) in the previous normal symbol stop display process. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner, in this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the variable start winning device 28 on the assumption that the operation condition is satisfied. The operating conditions for the variable start winning device 28 will be described later.

  While the variable start winning device 28 is in operation, the jump destination is set in the variable start winning device management process (step S5001) in the previous execution selection process (step S1001), and the normal symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable start winning device management process, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 is energized a predetermined number of times (for example, once) so that the variable start winning device 28 operates in a set pattern, and the start winning port is set. It is possible to generate a prize for 28a (lottery opportunity generation operation means). In the present embodiment, the special symbol game process also proceeds with the occurrence of the winning at the start winning opening 28a. However, for the sake of convenience, the normal symbol game process will be explained in advance below. .

[Normal pattern change pre-processing]
Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of normal symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the normal symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demo setting process in step S6500.

  Step S6500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol game process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6200.

  Step S6200: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol storage shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads a random number for lottery (normal random number determined per symbol) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 and stores it in, for example, another common storage area. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads the random numbers from the first section, and moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. Each random number stored in the common storage area is used for the operation lottery in the subsequent hit determination process.

  Step S6250: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol operating memory number subtraction process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the normal symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76, and sets the value after subtraction to the “normal symbol fluctuation start operation memory number”. As a result, the display mode of the number stored by the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33 changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S213 in FIG. 8). When the procedure so far is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6300.

  Step S6300: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit determination process (operation lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of normal symbol value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (operation lottery execution means). The range of normal symbol values set at this time is different between the non-time shortened state (when the time shortening function is not activated) and the time shortened state (when the time shortening function is activated). In addition, since the range of the winning value is expanded, the winning probability of the operation lottery is set extremely high as compared with the non-time shortened state. If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the winning value, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol winning flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S6400. In this embodiment, the hit value range is set on the program and hit determination is performed. However, the hit determination table is written in the ROM 74 in advance, and the hit determination is read and compared with the random number value. There are also programming examples. Further, the specific winning probability for each state will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S6400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the hit flag in the previous hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6404.

  Step S6404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process upon disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the normal symbol display device 33. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol designation command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since two LEDs are used for the normal symbol display device 33, for example, as described above, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is only the lighting display of one of the LEDs (lower side). The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved. Such a way of thinking can be similarly applied to a case where a 7-segment LED is used for the normal symbol display device 33.

  Step S6406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the normal symbol. The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the type of variation pattern or to define the variation time at that time, and is determined, for example, by random number lottery by the main control CPU 72. That is, the main control CPU 72 refers to, for example, a variation pattern selection table described later in this process, and selects a variation pattern number corresponding to a random number per symbol (non-winning one) on this table. In the table, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern number (for example, 6.0 seconds to 180 seconds) is preset (for example, FIG. 15), and the main control CPU 72 varies the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern number. Can be obtained from the table.

  The variation time is set differently in the non-time shortened state and the time shortened state. In the non-time shortened state, the variable time is set based on the variation pattern number selected as described above, but is fixed in the time shortened state. A value (for example, 0.6 seconds) is set. The setting of the variation time for each state will be further described later using another drawing.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set based on, for example, the “variable display start operation memory number (0 to 3)” set in step S6250. In other words, this indicates that the variation pattern selection table to be referenced varies depending on the number of working memories. For example, when the number of working memories is 0, the variation time between 6 seconds and 180 seconds is selected with a predetermined selectivity, whereas when the number of working memories is 3, the selectivity Are set differently, a short fluctuation time is easily selected, and a long fluctuation time is difficult to select. The specific contents of the variation pattern selection table will be further described later with reference to another specific example.

  When the variation pattern number is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number is generated. The generated variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The above steps S6404 and S6406 are control procedures when the hit determination result is out of order, but when the determination result is hit (step S6400: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure.

  Step S6410: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a winning stop symbol number. However, in this embodiment, since a plurality of winning symbols are not provided for the normal symbol, the main control CPU 72 basically selects one type of stop symbol number at all times.

  Step S6412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to a hit fluctuation pattern selection table to be described later, and acquires, for example, a reach group determination random number, a reach mode determination random number, and a fluctuation pattern determination random number from the counter area of the RAM 76, and based on those values. To determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol. In the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, basically, the hit reach variation pattern including the symbol effect is performed at the time of hitting the normal symbol, so the hit reach change pattern is finally selected here. In general, in the case of the reach fluctuation at the time of hit, the fluctuation time longer than that at the time of the normal fluctuation is determined. In addition to the acquisition of the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in step S6412, for example, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number may be acquired in the normal symbol memory update process (FIG. 11). In this case, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired normal symbol variation random number as a set with the winning random number in step S23 of the normal symbol memory update process. In addition, if the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number are stored, it is possible to generate a notice effect based on the pre-reading of the variation pattern using the stored contents. Is possible.

  In this process, when a variation pattern number is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number is generated. The generated variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S6413: The main control CPU 72 executes a hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (win symbol) by the normal symbol display device 33 based on the hit symbol number. However, as described above, since the stop symbol number is always one type in the present embodiment, the main control CPU 72 always determines one display mode (lights the upper LED on). The main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (winning time) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit), and sets the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a normal symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol game process.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 18 to FIG. 21 are diagrams showing an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss. This selection table is a table to be used at the time of a loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means, varying time defining means). Further, the selection table to be referred to differs depending on the number of working memories at the time of reference. For example, when the number of working memories at the time of reference is 0, the loss variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 18 is referred to. In addition, when the number of working memories is one, the selection table shown in FIG. 19 is referred to. When the number of working memories is two, the selection table shown in FIG. In the case of three, the selection table shown in FIG. 21 is referred to. The contents of each selection table are different, and specific contents will be described.

[Displacement variation pattern selection table (operating memory number = 0)]
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (number of working memories = 0). This selection table is referred to when the result of the hit determination corresponds to a loss and the number of working memories at the time of reference is zero.
For example, the “comparison value” and the “variation pattern number” are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. Each “variation pattern number” is associated with “variation pattern contents” having different contents. Each “variation pattern number” is associated with a “variation pattern command” having a different command value.

  For example, the “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “151”, “181”, “201”, “221”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” ”And“ 1 ”to“ 8 ”of“ variation pattern number ”are assigned to each“ comparison value ”.

  For example, the variation pattern numbers “1” to “4” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are variations that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds to the pattern. Among these, for variation patterns 7 and 8 (variation pattern numbers “7” and “8”), a relatively long variation time (for example, 1 minute or more) is set, and is defined as “a specific type of variation pattern” For example, a super reach effect that is relatively longer than a normal reach effect is executed.

  Therefore, the variation pattern number corresponding to each comparison value indicates that the prefetch variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (FIG. 13) is the same as this table. In other words, the fluctuation time and the presence / absence of the reach effect (special reach effect) relating to the change pattern number corresponding to each comparison value are the same regardless of the change pattern table. When the number is 0, it is the same as at the time of acquisition (when the winning memory is stored after winning).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 changes the comparison value in order because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. The comparison value is compared, and the comparison value “201” is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “4” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  When the variation pattern number is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number is generated. For example, “B6H03H” including a MODE value “B6H” and an EVENT value “03H” is generated as a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “4”. Here, the MODE value “B6H” indicates that the result of the hit determination using the normal symbol is out of order.

[Displacement variation pattern selection table (number of working memories = 1)]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (number of working memories = 1). This selection table is referred to when the result of the hit determination corresponds to a loss and the number of working memories at the time of reference is one.

  For example, the “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “151”, “181”, “201”, “221”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” ”For each“ comparison value ”,“ 1 ”“ 1 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ” 8 "is assigned.

  Here, the “variation pattern number” corresponding to the comparison value “151” is “2” in the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (operating memory number = 0), but “1” in this table. It has been changed to. In addition, the comparison value corresponding to “181” is changed from “3” to “2”, and the comparison value corresponding to “201” is changed from “4” to “2”. Represents that “221” is changed from “5” to “4”, and the comparison value corresponding to “241” is changed from “6” to “5”. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern numbers corresponding to the comparison values “101”, “251”, and “255 (FFH)” are the same in the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table (operating memory number = 0) and this table. On the other hand, the variation pattern numbers corresponding to the other comparison values are different. In other words, whether or not there is a change time or reach effect (special reach effect) related to a change pattern number corresponding to a comparison value other than the comparison values “101”, “251”, and “255 (FFH)” depends on the table to be referenced. In other words, it is different depending on the number of working memories at the time of reference.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 changes the comparison value in order because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. The comparison value is compared, and the comparison value “201” is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  When the variation pattern number is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number is generated. For example, “B6H01H” including a MODE value “B6H” and an EVENT value “01H” is generated as a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “2”.

[Displacement variation pattern selection table (number of working memories = 2)]
FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (number of working memories = 2). This selection table is referred to when the result of the hit determination corresponds to a loss and the number of working memories at the time of reference is one.

  For example, the “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “151”, “181”, “201”, “221”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” ”And“ 1 ”,“ 1 ”,“ 1 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 8 "is assigned.

  Here, the “variation pattern number” corresponding to the comparison value “151” is “2” in the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (operating memory number = 0), but “1” in this table. It has been changed to. In addition, the comparison value corresponding to “181” is changed from “3” to “1”, and the comparison value corresponding to “201” is changed from “4” to “2”. Represents that “221” is changed from “5” to “2”, and the comparison value corresponding to “241” is changed from “6” to “4”. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern numbers corresponding to the comparison values “101”, “251”, and “255 (FFH)” are the same in the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table (operating memory number = 0) and this table. On the other hand, the variation pattern numbers corresponding to the other comparison values are different. In other words, whether or not there is a change time or reach effect (special reach effect) related to a change pattern number corresponding to a comparison value other than the comparison values “101”, “251”, and “255 (FFH)” depends on the table to be referenced. In other words, it is different depending on the number of working memories at the time of reference.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 changes the comparison value in order because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. The comparison value is compared, and the comparison value “201” is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  When the variation pattern number is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number is generated. For example, “B6H01H” including a MODE value “B6H” and an EVENT value “01H” is generated as a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “2”.

[Displacement variation pattern selection table (number of working memories = 3)]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (number of working memories = 3). This selection table is referred to when the result of the hit determination corresponds to a loss and the number of working memories at the time of reference is one.

  For example, the “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “151”, “181”, “201”, “221”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” ”And“ 1 ”,“ 1 ”,“ 1 ”,“ 1 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 2 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 8 "is assigned.

  Here, the “variation pattern number” corresponding to the comparison value “151” is “2” in the variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (operating memory number = 0), but “1” in this table. It has been changed to. In addition, the comparison value corresponding to “181” is changed from “3” to “1”, and the comparison value corresponding to “201” is changed from “4” to “1”. Represents that “221” is changed from “5” to “2”, and the comparison value corresponding to “241” is changed from “6” to “2”. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern numbers corresponding to the comparison values “101”, “251”, and “255 (FFH)” are the same in the deviation fluctuation pattern selection table (operating memory number = 0) and this table. On the other hand, the variation pattern numbers corresponding to the other comparison values are different. In other words, whether or not there is a change time or reach effect (special reach effect) related to a change pattern number corresponding to a comparison value other than the comparison values “101”, “251”, and “255 (FFH)” depends on the table to be referenced. In other words, it is different depending on the number of working memories at the time of reference.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 changes the comparison value in order because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. The comparison value is compared, and the comparison value “201” is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “1” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

  When the variation pattern number is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number is generated. For example, “B6H00H” having a MODE value “B6H” and an EVENT value “00H” is generated as a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “1”.

[Example of the variation pattern selection table for hits]
FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used when winning in a win. In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Therefore, the variation pattern number corresponding to each comparison value indicates that the hit prefetch variation pattern selection table (FIG. 14) and this table are the same. In other words, the fluctuation time and the presence / absence of reach production (special reach production) for the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to each comparison value are the same regardless of the fluctuation pattern table. And when the working memory is stored).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the random value for determining the variation pattern at that time is “147”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 151 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number. Then, “B8H01H” having a MODE value “B8H” and an EVENT value “01H” is generated as a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number “14”. Here, the MODE value “B9H” indicates that the result of the hit determination based on the normal symbol is win.

  As described above, the variation pattern selection table to be referred to differs depending on the number of working memories at the time of reference, and the variation pattern number to be selected may be changed accordingly. That is, the variation pattern determination random number value indicates that the variation pattern number may differ depending on the number of working memories at the time of reference, or the variation pattern number may be the same regardless of the number of working memories at the time of reference. Yes.

  For example, assuming that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value is “234”, when the working memory number at the time of reference is “0”, the selected fluctuation pattern number is “6”, and the working memory number at the time of reference. Is “1”, the selected variation pattern number is “5”, and when the working memory number at the time of reference is “2”, the selected variation pattern number is “4”. When the number of working memories is “3”, the selected variation pattern number is “2”, indicating that the selected variation pattern number is different. On the other hand, assuming that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value is “246”, when the working memory number at the time of reference is “0”, the selected fluctuation pattern number is “7”, and the working memory number at the time of reference. Is “1”, the selected variation pattern number is “7”, and when the working memory number at the time of reference is “2”, the selected variation pattern number is “7”. Is “3”, the selected variation pattern number is “7”, indicating that the selected variation pattern number is the same.

  Here, as described above, the loss variation pattern selection table that is referred to when the working memory number at the time of reference is “0”, and at the time of acquisition (when the working memory is stored after winning) It has been described that the selected variation pattern number is the same as that of the loss-read-ahead variation pattern selection table referred to for the pre-determination. However, as described above, it has been described that the variation pattern selected by the comparison value differs when the number of working memories at the time of reference is not “0” but “1” to “3”. Therefore, regarding the time of loss, the pre-reading variation pattern number selected at the time of acquisition (when winning and storing the working memory) may be selected as a different variation pattern number at the time of variation, and the same variation pattern This indicates that a number may be selected. That is, when the prefetch variation pattern number is “6”, a variation pattern number different from “2” may be selected during the variation, or when the prefetch variation pattern number is “1”, This indicates that the same change pattern number as “1” may be selected during the change.

  Here, the prefetch variation pattern number selected at the time of acquisition is the same as the variation pattern number selected at the time of the variation and is not changed, and is defined as a fixed value, and the prefetch variation pattern number selected at the time of acquisition is selected at the time of the variation An indefinite value is defined as one that may be different from the changed variation number and that may be changed. Next, it will be described whether the prefetch fluctuation pattern number selected at the time of acquisition corresponds to a fixed value or an indefinite value.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of an indefinite value fixed value correspondence table for each prefetch variation pattern number. As shown in the figure, one of “indefinite value / fixed value” is represented corresponding to each “prefetch fluctuation pattern number”.

  For example, the prefetch fluctuation pattern numbers “1”, “7”, and “8” at the time of loss correspond to fixed values, and the same fluctuation pattern number is selected even when the prefetch fluctuation pattern number is the fluctuation. It represents that. In addition, the prefetch variation pattern numbers “2” to “6” at the time of loss correspond to indefinite values, and there is a possibility that a different variation pattern number may be selected even when the prefetch variation pattern number varies. Represents. In addition, regarding the hitting time, all the prefetch fluctuation pattern numbers “13” to “20” correspond to fixed values, and the same fluctuation pattern number is selected even when the prefetch fluctuation pattern number is the fluctuation. Represents.

  Whether the pre-reading variation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value or an indefinite value determines whether or not to determine the effect contents at the time of the variation in advance. . For example, if the look-ahead variation pattern number corresponds to an indefinite value, the variation time may be changed, so even if the content of the effect at the time of the change is determined in advance, the content of the effect at the time of the change Represents that it cannot be executed, and the process of determining in advance is wasted, so that it is determined not to determine in advance. On the other hand, if the pre-reading variation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value, it is determined that the variation time is a predetermined time, so the contents of the effect at the time of the variation can be determined, that is, in advance It will be decided to judge.

[FIG. 16: Normal symbol changing process, normal symbol stop display process]
When returning to the normal symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol changing process (step S3001) as the next jump destination. In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and thereafter, according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter count number). Decrement the timer counter value. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the normal symbol fluctuation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the normal symbol stop display process (step S4001) as the next jump destination.

  In the normal symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the normal symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the hit stop symbol determination process (steps S6404 and S6410 in FIG. 17). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. If the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the variable start winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable start winning device management process. The variable start winning device management process includes a subroutine group of a game process selection process (step S5101), an opening pattern setting process (step S5201), an opening / closing operation process (step S5301), a closing process (step S5401), and an end process (step S5501). It is the structure containing.

  Step S5101: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S5201 to S5501). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable start winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation of the variable start winning device 28 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects an opening pattern setting process (step S5201) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the opening / closing operation process (step S5301) as the next jump destination, and if the opening / closing operation process has been completed, it closes as the next jump destination. A process (step S5401) is selected. When the opening / closing operation process and the closing process are executed, the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5501) as the next jump destination. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Open pattern setting process]
Step S5201: In the opening pattern setting process, the main control CPU 72 sets, for example, an operating time (opening time) and the number of operations (opening frequency) as the opening pattern of the variable start winning device 28. In the present embodiment, the operating time and the number of operations of the variable start winning device 28 are set in common in both the non-time shortening state and the time shortening state. The main control CPU 72 sets an opening / closing operation process (step S5301) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5301: In the next opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 drives the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 212 based on the operation time set in the previous step S5201. Thus, the variable start winning device 28 is actually actuated (opened). The main control CPU 72 sets a closing process (step S5401) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5401: In the closing process, the main control CPU 72 counts the elapsed operating time based on the timer counter value. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 switches the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 212 to the non-operating state (OFF). Then, the main control CPU 72 sets an end process (step S5501) as the next jump destination.

  Step S5501: In the end process, the main control CPU 72 sets conditions for ending the operation of the variable start winning device 28. For example, the main control CPU 72 resets the value (01H) of the ordinary electric accessory operation flag. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1001 in FIG. 16) in the normal symbol game process to the normal symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable start winning device management process.

[Normal symbol operating condition setting table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a normal symbol operating condition setting table. In this normal symbol operating condition setting table, the normal symbol hit probability and variation time are set differently in the non-time shortened state (during normal time) and the time shortened state (during time short), and the variable start winning device 28 for hitting is set. This is for setting an opening pattern (operation time and number of operations).

  As shown in the upper part excluding the heading line in FIG. 25, in the present embodiment, in the operation lottery performed in the non-time shortening state (when the time shortening function is not operated), a normal hit probability (for example, 1 / 99) applies. In addition, for the normal symbol variation display performed in the non-time shortened state, the variation time set using the normal symbol variation random number as described above is applied.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part excluding the heading line in FIG. 25, in the operation lottery performed in the time shortening state (when the time shortening function is activated), a higher hit probability (for example, 98 / 99≈1 / 1.01) applies. Thereby, in the time shortening state, the operation lottery is won (the operation condition is satisfied) more frequently than in the non-time shortening state, so that the variable start winning device 28 is more likely to be won. Further, for the normal symbol variation display performed in the time shortening state, a fixed variation time (for example, 0.6 seconds) set in advance as described above is applied. However, in this embodiment, the operating time is set to be common (for example, 6.0 seconds) in both the non-time shortened state and the time shortened state, and the number of times of operation (one time) is also set in common. ing.

  The above is the outline of the control method for operating the operation lottery and variable start winning device 28 performed through the normal symbol game process (step S207 in FIG. 8). Next, a special symbol storing process (step S11 in FIG. 10) accompanying the winning to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) and a special symbol game process (in FIG. 8) that proceeds with the occurrence of the winning. The contents of step S206) will be described.

[Special symbol memory processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol storing process. Hereinafter, the special symbol storage process will be described along with a procedure example.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the special game management status is “00H”. The special game management status is separately set by the main control CPU 72 as follows according to the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol.

[Special Game Management Status]
That is, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special game management status (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (8) corresponding to the special symbol as follows, for example.
(1) Special symbol change waiting state: “00H”
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display state: “01H”
(3) Special symbol stop display state: “02H”
(4) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) waiting to be opened: “03H”
(5) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) open state: “04H”
(6) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) Closed after opening: “05H”
(7) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed state: “06H”
(8) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) during operation end state: “07H”

  When the value of the special game management status is other than “00H”, that is, when the current game progress status is other than the special symbol change waiting state (00H) (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 performs switch input event processing (FIG. Return to 10). On the other hand, if the value of the special game management status is “00H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S32.

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 obtains the jackpot determined random number value from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 described above. The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 has a data bus width of 8 bits, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determined random number value from the designated address, it saves it as a jackpot determined random number at the address of the transfer destination (random number storage area).

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a big hit symbol random number value from the big hit symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves it as a jackpot symbol random number at the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 acquires, for example, a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the special symbol. Similarly, the acquisition of the random number value is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it in the transfer destination address.

  Step S36: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determined random number, jackpot symbol random number, and variation pattern determined random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the special symbol (at this time, the free state), and stores these random numbers as a set. .

  Step S38: The main control CPU 72 executes a production command output setting process for the special symbol. This process is for performing setting for transmitting a start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124, for example.

  When the above procedure is completed or the special symbol operation memory has already been stored (step S30: Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (special game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changing process. Is completed (special game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol display device 34 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the special symbol display device 34. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the “limiter count” for the probability variation function or performs a subtraction process. The specific contents of the process and the significance of the “limiter count” will be further described later.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, an opportunity to shift to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, up to 6.0 seconds or until one winning is counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, twice). As a result, the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (variable winning means). During this period, the game ball is entered (winned) into the variable prize winning device 30, thereby giving the player an opportunity to win a prize ball (for example, 6 prize balls are paid out for one prize). (Winning privilege grant means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as “round”, and if the number of continuous operations is two, these may be collectively referred to as “2 rounds”. However, in this embodiment, since the opening time per time is relatively short (6.0 seconds) and the number of counts in one round is the minimum (for example, one), the general 15 rounds Compared with big hits (for example, 1 round 29 seconds open, number of counts 9), the number of prize balls that can be obtained with one big hit (2 rounds) is smaller.

  In any case, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the variable winning device 30 for one round Each time the release operation is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. When the value of the round counter reaches the set number of continuous operations (in this example, 2 times), the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (main role) only for that round.

  When the big hit game (opening operation of the variable winning device 30) is finished, the main control CPU 72 determines the state (high probability state) after the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability changing function operating flag or time shortening function operating flag). , Change the time reduction state). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function operates, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes higher than usual (high probability state transition means). In the present embodiment, even if the probability variation function is in a “low probability state” in which the probability variation function is not activated, the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to a high value of about one half (for example, about 32768/65536). When shifting to the “high probability state” from here, the winning probability is set to a higher probability (for example, about 65535/65536).

  Also, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability (for example, 1/99 → 98/99), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set (for example, fixed at about 0.6 seconds). In addition, the variation time of the special symbol is also set to be shorter than the non-time shortened state (for example, fixed at about 0.6 seconds). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them. Also, regarding the mechanism of internal state change such as “low probability state” or “high probability state”, “non-time shortening state” or “time shortening state”, the winning symbol (winning type) of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 1 This will be further described later together with the game system.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not there is a special symbol operation memory in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Alternatively, the main control CPU 72 may refer to the value of the working memory number counter to confirm whether the working memory number corresponding to the special symbol is other than 0 (= 1). Note that the operation memory of the special symbol is generated when a winning is made to the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a) in the switch input event process as described above. At this time, when it is confirmed that there is no working memory of the special symbol that should start changing (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process (FIG. 27). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a special symbol working memory (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, first, the main control CPU 72 reads a lottery random number (a jackpot determined random number, a jackpot symbol random number) stored in a random number storage area of the RAM 76. The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area, and the working memory is erased (consumed) from the random number storage area. Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In any case, if the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the special symbol display device 34, for example, the display pattern of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to display only one segment (center bar “-”). The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol. The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of deviation is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). If it is not “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is determined based on, for example, a fluctuation pattern determination random number. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time (at the time of disconnection) in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  The above steps S2404 and S2406 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but when the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs the following procedure. Run. In this embodiment, even in the low probability state, the winning probability is a high value of 1/2, and even in the low probability state, the following processing is selected once every two times at the time of change.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the current winning symbol type (successful symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

  Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number read in the previous step S2300. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. The fluctuation time at the time of big hit also differs depending on whether or not the above-mentioned “time reduction state”. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and checks whether or not the current state is the “time reduction state”. In the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time is basically set to a shortened time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) even at the big hit time. If it is not “time shortening state”, a variation pattern corresponding to a certain long variation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 90 seconds) is set in order to secure a time for performing the effect during variation at the time of big hit. Further, in this embodiment, even when the “non-time shortened state” is off, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a certain long fluctuation time is set in order to execute “out of reach reach” during the fluctuation of the special symbol. The In any case, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of big hit) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of big hit in the stop symbol display timer.

  Step S2413: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the probability variation function activation flag (for example, as a gaming state flag) when the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 corresponds to any probability variation symbol, for example. 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76, and a count counter value (for example, 10,000 times) is set together. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag as the gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 when the time shortening function operation count corresponding to the winning symbol determined at that time is added. At the same time, the count counter value (100 times or 10,000 times) is set. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a time shortening function operation number command (or a count cut counter number command) based on the value of the time shortening function operation number added corresponding to the winning symbol. The time reduction function activation number command generated here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. The addition of the type of winning symbol and the number of times the time shortening function is activated will be described later with a specific example.

  In step S2413, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the special symbol display device 34 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit), and sets the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the stop symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern in the display timer. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[FIG. 27: Special Symbol Fluctuation Processing, Special Symbol Stop Display Processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404 and S2410 in FIG. 28). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag. The special symbol stop display in-progress process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
Next, the types of winning symbols determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 28) will be described. In this embodiment, the following three types are roughly prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The three types of breakdown are, for example, “2-round normal symbol 1”, “2-round probability variable symbol 1”, and “2-round probability variable symbol 2”. In the present embodiment, since winning symbols having different numbers of rounds are not provided, hereinafter, the number of rounds is not described, and “normal symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 2”, and the like are appropriately omitted. . Moreover, these are only preferable examples, and the above three types of winning symbols are not exhaustive.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a component row of the big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol with reference to the big hit stopping symbol selection table shown in FIG. 29 in the previous big hit stopping symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 28) (winning type). Decision means). Further, the main control CPU 72 can determine the number of times the time shortening function is activated according to the determined gaming state (non-time shortening state, time shortening state, low probability state, high probability state) for each determined winning symbol.

  In the big hit stop symbol selection table shown in FIG. 29, the leftmost column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “2”, “55”, “43” has a denominator. This corresponds to a ratio (selection ratio) when 100 is set. In the second column from the left, “normal symbol 1”, “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big win in the internal lottery, the ratio that “normal symbol 1” is selected is 2/100 (= 2%), and the rate that “probable variation 1” is selected is 55/100 ( = 55%), and the rate at which “probability pattern 2” is selected is 43/100 (= 43%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Here, “normal symbol 1” is a winning symbol (non-probable variation symbol) that does not activate the probability variation function after the big hit. Therefore, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol is 98% as a whole, and the “probability variation symbol” is selected at a very high ratio at the time of big hit.

[First-time limiter]
Next, in the table shown in FIG. 29, the third column from the left shows the number of times (upper limit number) of “first limiters” set for each winning symbol at the time of big hit. “Initial limiter” is set when it corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”. In this embodiment, for “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2” Is also “17 times”. Of course, the “first limiter” is not set for “normal symbol 1” (indicated as “none” in the figure).

[Time reduction function operation count (time reduction count)]
Next, a description will be given of the difference in the number of times the time shortening function is activated for each winning symbol (winning type) and each winning state. In the present embodiment, the three types of winning symbols described above differ in the number of times the time shortening function is activated depending on the state at the time of winning. This will be specifically described below.

(1) Low probability non-short-time medium As shown in the third column from the left in FIG. 29, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “low probability state” and the normal symbol (operation lottery) is “non-probable”. It is assumed that the time is in a “time shortening state” (normal time that is neither probabilistic nor time-saving). In this case, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function activation number are added. In addition, when it corresponds to "normal symbol 1", the state after the big hit ends becomes a "low probability state".

  Further, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, 10,000 times of time reduction function activation times are added. It should be noted that the state after the jackpot is a “high probability state” regardless of whether the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when winning in the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol from the low probability non-short time (probability of 1/2), it becomes “time reduction state” after the end of the big hit game regardless of the winning symbol. . Therefore, the state does not shift to the “high probability non-short-to-medium” state, and is always in the “time reduction state” after the big hit. Further, the difference in the number of time reductions added in the “time reduction state (short time and medium)” is set as follows.

[Limiter count setting]
First, in the present embodiment, with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), the internal state at the time of winning is “low probability state”, and from there, winning either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (first winning) Then, as described above, the “limiter count (initial limiter)” is set (continuous count setting means). This “limiter count” is a limit (continuous count) that can be determined continuously when the main control CPU 72 corresponds to either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” when winning in the “high probability state”. Means.

[Selection of initial limiter count]
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “17 times” is selected as described above when setting the “number of limiters (initial limiter)”. This selection can be determined depending on whether the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met when winning from the “low probability state”. That is, when winning (first winning) with either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” from “low probability state”, in the previous special symbol stop display process (step S4000 in FIG. 27), When the “limiter (limiter number)” is set, 17 times (including the first time) are selected (continuous number selection means).

[Subtraction of limiter count]
In any case, the “limiter count (first limiter)” set at the first hit from the “low probability state” is the “probability pattern 1” or “probability pattern 2” following the winning in the “high probability state”. 1 (other than “normal symbol 1”), one is subtracted each time, and the remaining number decreases. However, while the “limiter count” does not reach the remaining zero (there is one or more remaining), the main control CPU 72 performs the “high probability state” in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 28). It is possible to determine that it corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” continuously when winning. Therefore, first, a case where there is one or more remaining “limiter count” (before reaching the limiter) will be described.

(2) High probability before and after reaching the limiter For example, as shown in the third column from the right in FIG. 29, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “high probability state” and the normal symbol ( It is assumed that the “operating lottery” is in the “time reduction state”. That is, when the probability probability symbol 1 or the probability variation symbol 2 is met during the low probability non-time reduction in (1) above, the high probability time reduction state is reached after the big hit. Even in this case, the number of times the time shortening function is activated is added regardless of the winning symbol. Specifically, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function operation are added. In addition, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, in any case, the time reduction function operation count of 10,000 times is added. In this case, since either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is continuously won in the “high probability state”, “limiter count” is decremented by 1 as described above. In addition, regardless of whether it is “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2”, the state after the big hit is a “high probability state” and a “time reduction state”. On the other hand, in the case of “normal symbol 1”, the state after the big hit ends returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), but the “time reduction state” is maintained with respect to the normal symbol (operation lottery). The following is “(3) Low probability time short and medium”.

(3) Low probability during short time For example, as shown in the second column from the right in FIG. 29, the special symbol (internal lottery) is “low probability state” and the normal symbol (operation lottery) Assuming the case of “time reduction state”. If it falls under “Normal Symbol 1” during the low probability non-time reduction in (1) above, or if it falls under “Normal Symbol 1” during the high probability time short before reaching the limiter in (2) above, It becomes a state. In this case as well, the time reduction function operation count is always added to any of the three types of winning symbols. Specifically, when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1”, 100 times of the time shortening function operation are added. In addition, when the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, in any case, the time reduction function operation count of 10,000 times is added. In this case, since “low probability state” to “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is selected first, “limiter count” is reset. In this resetting, if the winning symbol is “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, 17 times is selected. And even if it corresponds to either "probability variation symbol 1" or "probability variation symbol 2", since the state after the big hit is a "high probability state" and a "time reduction state", as a result, the above (2) The high probability before and after reaching the limiter will be resumed. On the other hand, in the case of “normal symbol 1”, the state after the big hit ends returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery), but the “time reduction state” is maintained with respect to the normal symbol (operation lottery). The

[When reaching the limiter]
In the “high probability state”, either “probability variation 1” or “probability variation 2” is won (selection ratio 98%), and “limiter count” is subtracted each time. Assume that the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero.

  When the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0, the main control CPU 72 cannot determine that either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met when winning in the “high probability state”. . Specifically, even if the jackpot symbol random number corresponds to either “probable symbol 1” or “probable symbol 2”, the final winning symbol is “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2”. It is forcibly changed to (Winning type restriction means).

(4) High probability when reaching the limiter Short and medium The forced change of the winning symbol is shown in the rightmost column in FIG. That is, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 in the “high probability state” and the “time shortening state”, even if it corresponds to “probability variation 1” (selection ratio 55%) on the table, The final winning symbol is forced to “normal symbol 1” (composite selection ratio is 57%). Or even if it is a case corresponding to "probability variation 2" (selection ratio 43%) on the table, the final winning symbol will be forced to "normal symbol 2". As a result of the forced (restriction) of the winning symbol, the “high probability state” after the remaining “limiter count” reaches zero is not continued, and once the big hit ends, it becomes “low probability state”. It will be forcibly restored. In addition, when “normal symbol 1” is normally selected as the winning symbol and when “normal symbol 1” is forcibly selected (composite selection ratio 57%), the time reduction function is 100 times. The number of times of operation is added, but when “normal symbol 2” is forcibly selected (selection ratio 43%), the number of times of time shortening function operation is not added (0 time = no time reduction). This means that when the “limiter count” reaches zero, it always returns to the “low probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery). This means that the rate of return is 43% of the total, and the remaining 57% is maintained in the “time reduction state”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be seen that the number of times the time shortening function is added is different depending on the state at the time of winning and the number of remaining limiters (before arrival / when reaching). In particular, in the present embodiment, “(4) High probability when the limiter is reached” becomes “non-time shortened state” only when “normal symbol 2” is forcibly selected, and otherwise “ It turns out that it becomes a "time shortening state". In the present embodiment, the case where the number of times the time shortening function is activated is added is “normal symbol of the first category (normal winning type)”, and the case where the number of times of time shortening function is activated is not added is the “normal symbol of the second category ( Normal winning type) ”.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process (step S3000 in FIG. 27). A method for setting the above “limiter count” (selecting the first limiter 17 times) and performing a subtraction process will be described below along with a specific procedure for the special symbol stop display process.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (for example, decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 27) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4310.

  Step S4310: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol is a probability variation symbol. This confirmation can be made based on the big hit stop symbol number. That is, if the current big hit stop symbol number corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S4320.

[When probability variation is selected]
Step S4320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning time is the “high probability state”. When the current winning time is the “low probability state” (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4332.

  Step S4332: When the winning symbol is either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, the main control CPU 72 sets 17 as the “limiter count (first limiter)” (continuous count selection means and continuous count) Processing as setting means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 saves 17 times (remaining limiter number = 17) as the value of the “limiter count”, for example, in the remaining number counter area of the RAM 76.

  Step S4340: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the first “limiter count” set in the previous step S4332. This is because the “limiter count” includes the time of the first chance variation winning from the “low probability state”. In this embodiment, the “limiter count” including the first chance variation winning (first time) is set. However, when the “limiter count” is set not to include the first limit (for example, 16 times), step S4340 is performed. You may adopt the logic which skips.

  The above is an example of the procedure when the current winning time is the “low probability state”, but when the current winning time is the “high probability state” (step S4320: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Perform the procedure.

[Subtraction of 17 initial limiters]
Step S4340: When the initial limiter is 17 times, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the "limiter count" and saves (updates) the value after the subtraction in the remaining number counter area. That is, when the “high probability state” after the “limiter count” is set to 17 times for the first time, and the current winning is the second consecutive of “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2”, Since the “limiter count” has already been subtracted to 16 at the time of the first winning, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one more “limiter count” at the second time and updates the “limiter count” to the remaining 15 times. To do. Or, if this time's winning is “Continuous Variation 1” or “Continuous Variation 2”, the “Limiter Count” subtracted 15 times in the 2nd time is subtracted by 1 in the 3rd time. The “limiter count” is updated with the remaining 14 times. As a result, when the first “limiter count” is set to 17 and the “high probability state” is a big hit, if either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is consecutively met, Each time the “limiter count” is decreased, the continuous count subtraction means.

  After this, if it falls under either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” up to the 17th time every winning, the “limiter count” subtracted to the remaining one time in the 16th time is further increased to 17 If one is subtracted at the second time, the rest reaches zero. In this case, when the main control CPU 72 executes the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 28) at the next winning, the “limiter count” remains 0 when determining the winning symbol using the table of FIG. Since the number of times has been reached, “probability pattern 1” is forced to “normal pattern 1” and “probability pattern 2” is forced to “normal pattern 2” as described above.

[Normal design selected]
On the other hand, in the previous step S4310, the current big hit stop symbol number corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal symbol 1”, or “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2” forcibly determined. If this is the case (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4345.

  Step S4345: In this case, the main control CPU 72 clears the value of “the number of limiters” to 0 (remaining number of limiters = 0). Note that the main control CPU 72 selects “normal symbol 1” or “normal symbol 2” as the current winning symbol in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 28) (including forcing). Therefore, the value of “the number of limiters” may be cleared.

  Step S4346: In any case, when the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 next generates a limiter remaining number command based on the current “number of limiters”. The limiter remaining number command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S4350: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management processing”.

  Step S4355: Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of cut-off function operation. Thereby, when at least one of the time reduction function or the probability variation function is activated before the big hit game is started, the function is deactivated.

Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.
When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter value is set in the probability variation count area or the time-short count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. Here, although “number of times cut” is used, the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” is set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). Also, in the case of the “time reduction state”, the number of times of operation may be added 10,000 times depending on the winning symbol as described above. By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In addition, when 100 times is added as the number of times of operation in the “time reduction state”, the value of the count cut counter is set to 100 times, but in this embodiment, the normal symbol in the “time reduction state” (operation lottery) Since the winning probability is approximately one-tenth (98/99), it is probabilistically guaranteed that the “time reduction state” will continue until the next time even 100 times.

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count-down counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 erases the flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag is erased, but the value of the count-down counter is not substantially zero in the “high probability state” as described above, and similarly In the “time shortening state”, the value of the count-down counter is substantially zero. However, since it may occur theoretically, if the value of the count-down counter actually becomes 0, the corresponding probability variation function activation flag or time reduction function activation flag is deleted. As a result, the “high probability state” or the “time reduction state” ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S213 in FIG. 8) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a subroutine group of a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), and an operation memory display setting process (step S1230). It is.

  Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are, as already described, the special symbol display device 34, the normal symbol display device. 33 and a process of generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) is a process for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. The probability variation state display lamp 38c continues to be lit until the big hit game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off (inactivated) after the special symbol variation display is performed a specified number of times. Thereafter, it is switched to non-display (turned off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  In this state display setting process (step S1220), the main control CPU 72 also controls the firing position designation display lamp 38e of the game state display device 38. For example, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation display lamp 38e when the special game is being executed or the time reduction function is in operation.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not yet been started, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .

  Step S5200: In the special winning opening opening pattern setting process, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern for each opening time, closing time, interval and number of rounds in one round. In the present embodiment, the maximum open time of one round is, for example, “6.0 seconds”, the closing time is, for example, “about 0.5 seconds”, and the number of rounds is fixed to “2 rounds”. As a result, values are set in the open timer, the close timer, the interval timer, and the round number counter, respectively. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big winning opening / closing operation process. However, the above opening pattern is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Step S5300: Next, in the big winning opening / closing operation processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the opening / closing operation (opening operation) of the variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90. As a result, the opening / closing member 30a of the variable winning device 30 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, and it becomes possible to generate a winning (winning) at the big winning opening 30b. Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the release timer, and if the value of the release timer is not less than or equal to 0, then the main control CPU 72 executes the counting of winning balls. When it is confirmed that the opening time has ended or the count number has reached a predetermined number (for example, one), the main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the closing timer. When the value of the closing timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 subsequently executes the count-down of the interval timer (only the first round). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the next jump destination is set to the big prize closing process. In the second round, when the value of the closing timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big prize closing process.

  Step S5400: In the special winning opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 continues the operation of the variable winning device 30 or ends the operation. That is, if the current gaming state is a big hit (a big game), the main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the first round ends, and the value of the round number counter increases at the stage toward the second round. The main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter when the next jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation processing.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100). Then, the variable winning device until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2 times) by the main control CPU 72 executing the special prize opening closing process again after the special prize opening opening / closing operation process is executed. 30 opening and closing operations are executed continuously. When the actual round number reaches the set execution round number, the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), and sets the next jump destination to the end process. Further, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72.
Step S5504: Also, the main control CPU 72 ends the state of being a big player internally here.

  Step S5505: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the flag area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2413 in FIG. 28) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5506: When the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5505: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number-of-times cut function activation flag corresponding to the probability variation function. Thereby, the internal state after the end of the big hit game is set to the “high probability state”.

  Step S5507: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, about 10,000). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, with a high probability (about 65,535,65536), the non-winning will hardly continue 10,000 times, so the high probability state will continue substantially until the next winning. If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5505: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5506 and S5507.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the flag area of the RAM 76 and checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This time shortening function operation flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2413 in FIG. 28) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing. If the time reduction function operation flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5511.

  Step S5511: When the value of the time shortening function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the time cut function operating flag corresponding to the time shortening function. As a result, the internal state after the end of the big hit game is set to the “time reduction state” (processing as the time reduction state transition means or the time reduction state maintenance means).

  Step S5512: Also, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the count-down counter corresponding to the time shortening function based on the number of times the time shortening function is activated (100 times or 10,000 times) corresponding to the current winning symbol. The set number-of-times counter value is stored in the above-mentioned time count area of the RAM 76. If the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5511, S5514. In this case, it does not shift to the “time reduction state” after the big hit ends (processing as a non-time reduction state return means).

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command here. Specifically, with the reset of the big hit flag, a state designation command that represents “normally” as the gaming state is generated. In addition, when the value of the count-off counter is set based on the number of times the probability variation function is activated, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, When “” is set, a state designation command indicating “time reduction state” is generated as an internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S213 in FIG. 8).

  Step S5516: After the above procedure at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 27) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

  The above is the contents of various control processes performed by the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). When the main control CPU 72 executes these processes, the game by the pachinko machine 1 is specifically progressed.

[Game Flow]
Next, FIG. 34 is a game flow diagram showing an example of a game flow by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. A game by the pachinko machine 1 proceeds by driving (launching) a game ball into the game area 8a in accordance with the player's operation. Hereinafter, the flow of the game on the premise that the game ball is launched will be described. In the following description, reference numerals F1 to F47 and the like in the drawings are indicated with parentheses as appropriate. Further, “winning” used in the following description means that “the detected ball is treated as valid”.

[F1] During normal game For example, when a player starts a game with the pachinko machine 1, it is assumed that the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a "normal game" state. In the present embodiment, the state of “normally playing” is “non-time shortened state (ordinary drawing low probability)” with respect to the normal symbol (operating lottery), and “low probability state (special feature) with respect to the special symbol (internal drawing). Means low probability).

[F2] Normal symbol non-winning [F1] During normal game, when the game passes through the middle start gate 20 (or the right start gate 21), the above-described operation lottery is executed. When the result of the operation lottery is non-winning, no internal state change occurs, and [F1] normal game is continued as it is.

[F3] Per normal symbol in normal game On the other hand, [F1] If the game lottery is won during normal game, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F4] Variable Start Winning Device Operation In this case, the variable start winning device 28 is operated, and it becomes possible to generate a winning at the start winning port 28a as described above. Due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), it is necessary to drive a game ball toward the right side in the game area 8a after winning the normal symbol (action lottery).

[F5] No winning When the variable starting winning device 28 is in operation (operating time 6.0 seconds) and no winning is made to the starting winning port 28a, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game. In this case, the game flow is resumed from the operation lottery.

[F6] Starting Port Winning In contrast, when a winning to the starting winning port 28a occurs while the variable start winning device 28 is operating (operating time 6.0 seconds), the game flow further proceeds to the next stage. In addition, although the winning that triggers the internal lottery is valid only once, each time a plurality of winnings (on average, 7 to 8 winnings) occur during operation of the variable start winning device 28, A prize bonus (for example, 12 prize ball payouts per prize ball) is given to the player.

[F7] Special symbol variation A special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning port 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F8] Non-winning When the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game and is resumed from the operation lottery.

[F11] Normal symbol 1 winning When the winning symbol is an internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned “normal symbol 1”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “normal symbol 1”. In this case, the game flow further proceeds to the next stage.

[F12] Variable winning device operation
The variable winning device 30 is opened by winning in the special symbol (internal lottery), and the number of times of opening is 2 (2 rounds). In the case of “normal symbol 1”, the probability variation function operation flag is not set, but the time reduction function operation count is set to 100 times. For this reason, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 is not [F1] during normal game, but proceeds to the stage of [F31] time reduction. In addition, the game flow from [F31] time is described later.

[F16] Probability Variation 1, 2 Winning On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned “probability variation 1”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “probability variation 1”. Alternatively, when the winning symbol corresponds to the “probability variation 2”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the “probability variation 2”. In either case, the game flow proceeds to the following stage.

[F14] Limiter remaining number set [F1a] In the case of normal winning, the “limiter count” is internally set to the remaining 16 times (the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the initial limiter 17 times) (limiter remaining) Number = 16).

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
By winning the special symbol (internal lottery), the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation. In addition, when either of the “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” is met, the probability variation function operation flag is set and the time reduction function operation frequency is set to 10,000 times. The game flow after the opening operation of 30 proceeds to the probability change (high probability, short time: F19).

[F19] Probability change (high probability, short time)
In the present embodiment, once the game flow enters [F19] probability change, it is easy to continue [F19] probability change in terms of probability. Hereinafter, this point will be specifically described.

[F20] Normal symbol non-winning [F19] During probability change, the winning probability of the normal symbol (working lottery) is set to approximately one-tenth (98/99), so it is probable that it will not win rare. However, in theory, there is a possibility of non-winning, and if it is not won, the game in [F19] probability change will be continued.

[F21] Per normal symbol during probability change In this embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), [F19] During the probability change, a game ball is shot into the right side of the game area 8a (so-called "right hit"). Is assumed. As a result, when the game ball passes through the right start gate 21, it is won with almost one change of the normal symbol. Since the variation time is shortened (0.6 seconds) as described above, the game flow proceeds to the next stage within a very short time.

[F22] Variable start winning device operation The variable start winning device 28 is activated by winning the normal symbol (actuation lottery), and the start winning port 28a is ready for winning. In the present embodiment, the operating time of the variable start winning device 28 is constant (6.0 seconds) even in the “time reduction state”. However, if a game ball is driven into the right side portion in the game area 8a, the game ball flows down toward the variable start winning device 28 that is operating as it is.

[F23] No winning Even if no winning is made to the starting winning opening 28a during operation of the variable starting winning device 28 for some reason (out of ball, clogged ball, defective firing operation, etc.), the game flow is [F19] Since the probability change is continued, there is no extreme disadvantage for the player.

[F24] Start opening prize [F19] If a winning to the start winning opening 28a occurs during the operation of the variable start winning apparatus 28 due to the "right-handed" flow during the probability change, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F25] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning port 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F26] Non-winning With regard to the special symbol (internal lottery), the winning probability in the “high probability state” is approximately one-tenth (65535/65536), and therefore, almost no non-winning occurs probabilistically. However, in the rare event that the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, since the game flow continues during [F19] probability change, there is no extreme disadvantage for the player. Moreover, since the maximum number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 10,000 times, even if one non-winning event occurs, the number of time reductions still remains.

[F27] Probability Variation 1, 2 Winning In this embodiment, since the probability variation ratio is 98% of the total as described above, the probability variation symbol is selected at a high frequency when winning. [F19] When the winning symbol falls under either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” during probability variation, 10,000 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated as described above. In [F19], the continuation during the probability change is confirmed internally.

[F28] Limiter remaining number -1
In this case, since the positive variation is continuously selected in the “high probability state”, the “limiter count” is subtracted internally (limiter remaining number−1).

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
Similarly, the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). The probability variation function activation flag is set and the time shortening function activation count is set to 10000 times for both cases of “probability variation symbol 1” and “probability variation symbol 2”. In addition, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 continues to be in the process of being probabilistic (high probability, short time: F19).

[Chance zone due to certain change]
As described above, once the game flow shifts to [F19] during certain change, [F21] from the normal symbol [F22] variable start winning device operation, [F24] start opening winning, [F25] special symbol fluctuation, [F27 ) Probability symbol 1, 2, winning, [F28] Limiter remaining -1, and [F18] Variable winning device activated, [F19] Looping during probability change is most frequent (or probability, rate, ratio) It becomes easy to occur. In this case, since the variable start winning device 28 is operated once in one loop and the variable winning device 30 performs the two round opening operation, the game ball is basically driven into the right portion in the game area 8a. If it is, the winning ball is paid out in response to the occurrence of the winning at the start winning opening 28a and the occurrence of the winning at the large winning opening 28b.

  Each time the above loop is performed once, [F28] Limiter remaining number -1 decreases the remaining "limiter count", but the same frequency remains high until the remaining zero is reached. The loop will be repeated.

[F29] Normal Symbol 1 Winning during Probability On the other hand, if [F19] Winning Symbol corresponds to “Normal Symbol 1” during Probability Change, the game flow is as follows. In this case, since it is not a probabilistic symbol, the “high probability state” is not maintained, but since 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, the continuation of the “time shortening state” is promised internally at this point. .

[F30] Variable winning device activated
Similarly, the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Although not shown, the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the control process of the main control CPU 72 as described above (limiter reset).

[F31] Shorter time [F19] If “normal symbol 1” is met from the probability change, the probability variation function activation flag is cleared, but the time reduction function activation count is set to 100 times. The game flow after the release operation shifts to a short time (low probability short time) (continuous number resetting opportunity generating means).

[F20] Normal symbol non-winning [F31] During the short time, the winning probability of the normal symbol (working lottery) is set to about 1 (98/99), so it is almost impossible to win Absent. In theory, however, there is a possibility of non-winning, so if it is not won, the game in [F31] time is continued.

[F32] per normal symbol during time reduction [F31] Even during the time reduction, if the game ball passes through the right start gate 21 in the “right-handed” flow as it is, it is won with almost one normal symbol change. Since the variation time is shortened (0.6 seconds) as described above, the game flow proceeds to the next stage within a very short time.

[F33] Variable start winning device operation The normal start (operating lottery) winning operation activates the variable start winning device 28 so that a winning can be generated at the start winning port 28a.

[F34] No win Similarly, even if no winning is made to the start winning opening 28a during the operation of the variable start winning device 28 for some reason (out of ball, clogged ball, etc.), the game flow is [ F31] Since the time is continued, there is no extreme penalty for the player.

[F35] Start opening prize [F31] If the winning to the start winning opening 28a occurs during the operation of the variable start winning apparatus 28 due to the "right-handed" flow in the short time, the game flow proceeds to the next stage.

[F36] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F37] Non-winning [F31] Regarding the special symbol (internal lottery) during the short time, the winning probability in the “low probability state” is one half (32768/65536), so there will be a chance of non-winning In that case, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. However, in this case, since the game flow continues for [F31], there is no extreme disadvantage for the player. In addition, since the number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 100 times, even if one non-winning event occurs, the number of time reductions (99 times) still remains. Therefore, during [F31] time reduction, it is relatively easy to win a prize by internal lottery.

[F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 winning in short time And since the probability change ratio is 98% of the whole as described above, the probability change symbol is also selected with high frequency at the time of winning. [F31] When the winning symbol corresponds to either “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” from the time shortening, 10,000 times are added as the number of times of the time reduction function operation as described above.

[F39] Number of remaining limiters = 16
In this case, since [F31] the “low probability state” during the time reduction corresponds to the first probability variation winning, the “limiter count” is internally reset here (the limiter remaining) Number = 16). Further, in this case, since it is a chance variation winning game, the following game flow will proceed.

[F18] Variable prize-winning device operation (during big role)
By winning the special symbol (internal lottery), the variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation. [F31] The probability variation function activation flag is set and the time shortening function activation count is set to 10000 times for any of the cases where “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” falls under time reduction. Therefore, the game flow after the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 is actually changed (high probability time short: F19) is resumed (re-entry, return).

[Addition of a limiter by normal winning during a certain change]
In the above game flow, even if the “limiter count” is subtracted to some extent while repeating the loop of [F19] probability change, if “normal symbol 1” is won in the middle, the “limiter count” is thereby determined. Is reset, and the “limiter count” is reset to the maximum value again by winning “probability variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (continuous count resetting trigger generation means).

  As a result, even if [F19] “Limiter count” during probability change is reaching the remaining 0, if “Normal design 1” is elected before that (selection ratio 2%), “Limiter” Since the “number of times” is reset, the game characteristic that the number of loops during [F19] probability change can be extended accordingly is realized.

[F40] Normal symbol 1 winning in time reduction Note that when the winning symbol corresponds to "normal symbol 1" following [F31] time reduction, 100 times is added as the number of times of the time shortening function operation. Accordingly, the game flow continues for [F31] time reduction after [F30] variable winning device operation.

  The above is the game flow that can occur before [F19] “Limiter count” reaches 0 remaining during [F19] probability change. On the other hand, as a result of repeating the above loop during [F19] probability change, when the remaining "limiter count" reaches zero, the following game flow is performed.

[Game flow when reaching the limiter]
FIG. 35 is a game flow diagram showing the game flow when the “limiter count” reaches the remaining zero. For example, in the case where [F19] variable start winning device is activated and [F24] start opening winning is generated per [F21] normal symbol in a state where [F19] “limiter count” reaches 0 remaining during [F19] probability change. Suppose.

[F41] Special Symbol Variation Similarly, a special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the start winning opening 28a. As a result, the special symbol display device 34 displays the variation of the special symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[F42] Non-winning Regardless of the “limiter count”, the winning probability of the “high probability state” with respect to the special symbol (internal lottery) is about one-tenth (65535/65536). Does not occur. However, in the rare event that the internal lottery is not won, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner. In this case, the game flow continues during [F19] probability change, but the “limiter count” remains 0. In addition, since the maximum number of times the time shortening function is activated is set to 10,000 times, the number of time reductions still remains even if a non-winning event occurs.

[F43] Normal symbol 1 winning [F19] The game flow is as follows when the winning symbol corresponds to “normal symbol 1” while the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0. In this case, since it is not a probability variable symbol, the remaining number of “limiter times” is not particularly related, and 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated.

[F44] Variable winning device activated
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). At this time, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0, but the remaining limiter is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the control process of the main control CPU 72 as described above.

[Chance zone continuation]
In this case, the game flow returns to [F31] time shortening, and from there, again in the “time shortened state”, [F32] per normal symbol, [F33] variable start winning device operation, [F35] start opening winning, [F36] special A game flow such as symbol variation proceeds. Then, [F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 wins, [F39] Limiter remaining number = 16, the “limiter count” is reset, and the game flow again proceeds to [F19] Probability change.

[F45] Probability symbol 1 winning → Forced normal 1
[F19] The game flow is as follows when the winning symbol corresponds to “probability symbol 1” with the remaining “limiter count” during probability variation reaching zero. In this case, since the remaining “limiter count” has already reached 0, it is not possible to select the probability variation symbol on the control process of the main control CPU 72, and the “normal symbol 1” is forcibly set as described above. Will be selected. In this case, the probability variation function activation flag is cleared, but 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, so the “time shortening state” continues.

[F44] Variable winning device activated
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Similarly, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0 at this time, but the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped.

[Chance zone continuation]
In this case as well, the game flow returns to [F31] time reduction, and from there, again in the “time reduction state”, [F32] per normal symbol, [F33] variable start winning device operation, [F35] start opening winning), [F36] A game flow such as special symbol variation proceeds. Then, [F38] Probability change symbol 1 and 2 wins, [F39] Limiter remaining number = 16, the “limiter count” is reset, and the game flow again proceeds to [F19] Probability change.

[F46] Probability symbol 2 winning → Forced normal 2
On the other hand, if the winning symbol is “probability variation 2” in the state where [F19] “limiter count” during probability variation has reached 0, the game flow is as follows. Also in this case, since the “limiter count” has already reached 0, it is not possible to select the probability variation symbol on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Then, “probability variation 2” is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2” as described above. In this case, since the probability variation function operation flag is cleared and 0 (= no time reduction) is set as the time shortening function operation count, the time shortening function operation flag is also cleared.

[F47] Variable winning device operation
The variable winning device 30 performs a two-round opening operation by winning a special symbol (internal lottery). Similarly, the remaining “limiter count” has reached 0 at this time, but the remaining limiter count is cleared to 0 after the special symbol is stopped.

[End of Chance Zone]
In this case, the game flow returns to [F1] normal game (normal game), and becomes a “non-time shortened state” and a “low probability state”.

[Summary of game flow]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game flow is once changed during [F19] probability change, the following features are clarified.
36 and 37 are conceptual diagrams showing classified game flow patterns according to the present embodiment. In the following, description will be given in order.

(1) Basic pattern (A) in FIG. 36: If the game flow once shifts to [F19] probability change after winning the “probability change symbol 1” or “probability change symbol 2”, basically a very high rate ( With a selection ratio of 98%), positive variation wins occur continuously. Therefore, if the “limiter count” before the first (first) chance of winning the change is considered as 17 times (up to 17 consecutive times including the first) for convenience, the remaining 16 “limiter count” will remain in the second consecutive win. 1 time is subtracted from the next consecutive 3rd chance change win, and it is 15 times. Further, in the fourth consecutive positive variation winning, 1 is further subtracted to 14 times (not shown).

  After this, the “Limiter Count” is subtracted every time the chance variation wins continuously, and when the 17th consecutive chance change winning count occurs from the first count, 1 is subtracted there and the “Limiter Count” remains. Reach 0 times. In this case, since the winning of the normal symbol is compulsory at the next winning, the probability variation winning is forcibly terminated up to 17 consecutive times.

(2) Limiter addition pattern In FIG. 36 (B): In the basic pattern of (1) above, before the “limiter count” reaches the remaining 0, for example, the first limit is passed through the correct variation selection n times, Consider a case where “number of times” corresponds to “normal symbol 1” with (17−n) remaining (selection ratio 2%). In this case, 100 times are added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated.

  36 (C): Then, since the transition to the above [F31] time shortening after the end of the major role, after passing the normal symbol (operating lottery) winning, the “special variation symbol 1” or “ By winning (combination selection ratio 98%) with “probable variation 2”, the “number of limiters” is reset. In this case, the probability variation winning corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, and therefore the possibility of further 17 consecutive chances of winning the probability variation including the first time is newly generated. In this case, the “number of limiters” is the sum of the newly generated 17 times (excluding the remaining (17−n) times) (ie, n times).

  Such addition can be repeated, and even if the “limiter count” is reset, if the “limiter count” reaches “0” again after the reset, 100 times are added as the number of shortening function operations.

  36 (D): Then, after the end of the big role, in the same way, the time shifts to the above [F31] time, so the normal symbol (working lottery) wins and the next special symbol (internal lottery) wins "probable variation 1 ”Or“ Probability variation 2 ”and winning (combination selection ratio 98%), the“ limiter count ”is reset there. Similarly, the probability variation winning in this case corresponds to the first time after the normal winning, so that the possibility of further 17 consecutive chance variation winnings including the first time has newly occurred.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the normal winning is performed before reaching the limiter during the [F19] accuracy change after selecting the first time limiter 17 times, the “limiter count” is reset (limiter) at the next time the accuracy change is selected. [F19] As a result of resuming the probability change, it is possible to realize a game as if the “limiter count” is added one after another. However, the “limiter count” is not increased in game control, and the normal symbol winning is always sandwiched between them, so that the gambling of the game is not extremely enhanced. Further, the number of times of addition is “17 times—the current number of remaining times”, and when the addition occurs, the number of remaining times is discarded.

(3) Continuation pattern after reaching the limiter (addition pattern after reaching the limiter)
(E) in FIG. 37: On the other hand, after selecting the first limiter 17 times, when the limiter arrival does not occur and the “limiter count” reaches 0 remaining according to the basic pattern of (1) above, Even if it corresponds to the “probable variation 1” at the 18th time, it is forcibly changed to “normal design 1”.

  (F) in FIG. 37: However, since the forced “normal symbol 1” in this case is added with 100 times as the number of times the time shortening function is activated, it shifts to the above [F31] time shortening after the end of the major role. . Then, after winning the normal symbol (working lottery) and winning the next special symbol (internal lottery) with “probable variation symbol 1” or “probability variation symbol 2” (composite selection ratio 98%), the “limiter count” is set again there. Is done. The probability variation winning in this case corresponds to the first time after the end of the probability variation, and therefore, the possibility of 17 consecutive chance variation winnings including the first time is added.

  In this case, as the game flow, [F19] during the probability change ends once reaching the limiter, but if the winning symbol at the time of reaching the limiter is forced to “normal symbol 1 (100 times short)”, [F31] short The “limiter count” is newly set during the next chance of winning the probability change from the inside, and [F19] is being resumed during the probability change. In addition, if it happens to correspond to “normal symbol 1” after reaching the limiter, 100 times is added as the number of times the time shortening function is activated. Therefore, the rate of shifting to [F31] time reduction after reaching the limiter is 57%, which combines the selection ratios of “normal symbol 1” and “probability variation 1”.

  In any case, by winning the “normal symbol with short time” after reaching the limiter, it is possible to realize a game characteristic as if the “number of limiters” seemed to be added (in this case, +17 times). Here too, the “variable number of limiters” is not increased in game control, but a forced normal symbol win (or pure normal symbol win) due to reaching the limiter in the meantime is generated. There is no increase in gambling.

(4) End pattern (G) in FIG. 37: On the other hand, if it corresponds to “probability variation 2” at the 18th consecutive time after reaching the limiter, it is forcibly changed to “normal symbol 2”. In this case, the number of times the time shortening function is activated is not added to the compulsory “normal symbol 2” (0 time = no time reduction). The game inside ends.

  The above is the outline of the prominent patterns (1) to (4) of the game flow by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. In particular, the above (2) limiter addition pattern and (3) the continuation pattern after reaching the limiter. The player's profit increases as each game flow occurs. However, the above patterns (2) and (3) are only performed on the control processing by the main control CPU 72, and it is difficult for the player to perceive the flow directly.

  Of course, if the display mode of the special symbol display device 34 is carefully observed, it is possible for the player to confirm what winning symbol the game corresponds to during the game. However, the special symbol display device 34 itself is a 7-segment LED, and the display mode of any winning symbol is somewhat symbolic (for example, “巳”, “self”, “L”, “¬”, “Γ”). Therefore, it is difficult to instantaneously determine the type of winning symbol from such a display mode.

  Further, the “limiter count” is an internal control variable, and is not displayed on the game state display device 38 in particular, so that the “limiter count” is added during the game, It is difficult for the player to directly know the control information such as that the “limiter count” has reached the remaining 0, or that the time limit has been reached and the normal symbol has been won.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect technique is used to easily convey to the player that the game flow is progressing along the patterns (1) to (4). Hereinafter, the production technique employed in the present embodiment will be described with some examples. Note that these are merely examples, and there is no particular limitation on the contents of the effect design and the effect image.

[Normal design off-line production]
First, FIG. 38 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect executed when [F2] normal symbol is not won. This effect example corresponds to normal symbol variation display and stop display, and is specifically an example of a variation display effect and a result display effect based on the effect symbol. Of these, the variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed during the period from when the normal symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped and displayed (including the fixed stop). The result display effect is an effect that represents that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the operation lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. As described above, since the normal symbol display device 33 itself is a lighting / flashing display using two LEDs, it does not have an appealing appearance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 basically performs a variable display effect and a result display effect using the effect symbols. In addition, since the normal symbol is only displayed in a simple manner (for example, one upper lamp is lit), the player can determine whether or not the winning symbol is selected unless it is a result display effect by the effect symbol. Hard to notice. On the contrary, this means that the player basically has a tendency to judge the result of the operation lottery from the contents of the production, and it can be said that the production plays an important role in the game flow.

  The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Of these, the medium effect design is smaller in size than the other left and right effect designs. In addition, the left and right production designs are designed with a picture card with some image attached, for example, with the Chinese numerals “1” to “8”, but the middle production design is an arithmetic number “ In addition to “1” to “8”, a design with some kind of image is designed. These left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol potentially constitute a symbol sequence in which, for example, Chinese numerals or arithmetic numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen. Hereinafter, the design of the symbol sequence constituting each effect symbol will be specifically described with reference to another drawing.

[Design composition of production design]
FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a design of a symbol row that configures the effect symbol. Hereinafter, the design contents of each symbol row of each effect symbol will be described. 39 (A) shows an example of the design of the common symbol sequence that constitutes the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol, and FIG. 39 (B) shows the design of the symbol sequence that constitutes the middle effect symbol. An example is shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 39, the left and right effect symbols are composed of eight symbol strings, each of which is designed with a picture card with different Chinese numerals and different images attached to each. It has become. For example, for the first design, a picture card with a Chinese numeral “one” and an image of “cat character” is designed. In addition, for the second design, images of the Chinese numerals “2” and “Haunted Umbrella”, for the third design, the Chinese characters “Three” and “middle-aged female character” For the 4th design, the Chinese characters “4” and “The lantern ghost” images For the 5th design, the Chinese characters “5” and the “Sennin Character” images, 6 For the design of the eyes, the images of the Chinese numerals “Six” and “Panda character”, for the seventh design, the images of the Chinese numerals “Seven” and “Female characters”, and for the eighth design This is a design of a picture card with the images of the Chinese numerals “eight” and “male character”.

  Therefore, each symbol in the symbol row indicates that a character is associated so as to correspond to a predetermined number. In addition, you may employ | adopt another kind of character, without limiting to said multiple types of character, and may employ | adopt multiple types of the same character with the number which each showed a different national flag ( For example, Japan, France, Turkey, China, Italy, Thailand, USA, Netherlands). In this way, by performing an effect that uses a plurality of different types of characters without depending on an effect of only numbers, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

  As shown in (B) of FIG. 39, the middle effect symbol is also composed of eight symbol sequences as in the case of the left and right effect symbols, and different arithmetic numbers and different images are attached to each. It is a design of a picture card that has been made. For example, for the first symbol, a picture card with an arithmetic number “1” and an image of “cat character” is designed. Here, the image of the character with the left and right effects design is the image of the “cat character” zoomed up around the face, whereas the image of the character with the middle effect design is “with flowers” It is from the image of "Ta" "Cat Character". Therefore, the design of the first symbol in the symbol sequence of the left, middle, and right production symbols must be set in the same category such as “Cat Character” but with different details. Represents. In addition, the design of the second to eighth symbols in the symbol sequence of the left / middle / right effect symbols is also set to the same category, and the detailed contents thereof are the left / right effect symbols and the middle effect symbols. And are set differently.

  For example, for the second symbol in the middle-design symbol pattern, a picture card with the arithmetic numbers “2”, “Beveled” and “Haunted Umbrella” images is designed. It has become. In addition, for the third symbol, images of arithmetic numbers “3” and “raised arms” and “middle-aged female character” images, and for the fourth symbol, arithmetic numbers “4” ”And“ The lantern ghost ”image,“ 5 ”and“ Sword character ”with arithmetic numbers for the 5th design, 6th image For the design, the numbers “6” and “the hair of the panda” “Panda Character” images, and for the seventh design, the numbers “7” and “Doze” The image of the “female character”, the eighth design, is a design of a picture card with the arithmetical numbers “8”, “smoking cigarettes” and “male character”. Yes. As described above, the design of the second to eighth symbols in the middle design symbol sequence is the same as the design category of the second to eighth symbols in the left / right design symbol sequence. The detailed contents are set differently for the left / right effect symbol and the middle effect symbol. Therefore, corresponding to the fact that the numbers are the same, but the Chinese characters and the arithmetic numbers are set differently, the character images have the same category but the detailed contents are set differently. Represents that.

  Reach by the category (for example, “female character”, “sennin character”, etc.) that corresponds to the design of the production design, as well as the variable display production using these left, middle and right production designs The production and the notice production will be described specifically.

  FIG. 38 is a continuous diagram illustrating an example of an effect image associated with normal symbol variation display and stop display. In addition, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown with respect to the variation of the normal symbol at the time of non-winning (loss). This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects that are performed from the time when a normal symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped (including a fixed stop). The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the operation lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
FIG. 38 (A): For example, in a state before the normal symbol starts to change (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. . At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the normal symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, a marker (indicated by reference numeral M1 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of a normal symbol is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The marker M1 represents the number of operating symbols of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol operating memory lamp 33) corresponding to each display number, and the displayed number increases or decreases in conjunction with the change of the operating memory number during the game. In addition, for the marker M1, the marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination. In the example of (A) in FIG. 38, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working symbols of the normal symbol is four (stored number display effect execution means).

[Fluctuating area]
In addition, the changing area HA is formed at the left end position of the band-like area at the bottom of the display screen. In the changing area HA, a marker image corresponding to the working memory consumed by the current change is displayed at a certain time. When the working memory is consumed due to the start of the next fluctuation, the marker image displayed next to the changing area HA (the head of each of the left and right columns) moves to the changing area HA, where there is a certain time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds). In this embodiment, if a marker image of the band-like region remains after the movement, a display is performed in which the marker image is sequentially moved (shifted) to the left so as to close after the leftmost marker image is missing. When a marker image is displayed in the changing area HA and a certain time elapses or the normal symbol is not changing, the changing area HA is grayed out as shown.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are added in the diagram) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to a normal symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to a special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the result display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the operation lottery is actually “winning” instead of “out of”, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a corresponding manner (for example, blue display color or red display color). Similarly, if the result of the internal lottery corresponding to the special symbol is “big hit”, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to that (for example, blue display color or red display color).

[Variable display production start]
FIG. 38 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the normal symbol, the three display symbols are scrolled and changed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to start the change display effect. That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the variable display effect is started such that the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case is, for example, a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “island” representing “coast mode”. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to the “coast mode”, various modes are provided for the “normal mode”, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). For example, “indoor mode”, “Noyama mode”, “park mode” and the like are provided. On the other hand, in addition to the “normal mode”, a “special mode” is provided, which corresponds to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, since the number of memory of the normal symbol is decreased by one with the start of the fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction therewith. For example, if there are four operating memory numbers so far, only one of the oldest (oldest) memory number displays in the marker M1 is hidden, and an effect consumed by the operation lottery is also performed. As a result, the player can be informed of the fact that the number of working memories related to the normal symbol has decreased.

  Then, since the first working memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one each. Production is being performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 38 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the Chinese numeral “eight” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 38 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol (not necessarily at the same time). When the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out of) manner, the stop display effect is similarly performed in the non-winning (out of) state. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the effect symbol representing the arithmetic number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of effect symbols is “eight”-“1”-“three”. Since this is a gap of “”, it is expressed in the production that the variation this time corresponds to the normal “falling”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the result display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the operation lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of winning (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win manner in the result display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is basically selected in correspondence with the winning symbol (stop display mode of the normal symbol display device 33) selected internally by the main control CPU 72.

[Normal design per design]
Next, FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect executed at the time of [F3] normal symbol hitting. In FIG. 38, an example of an effect that is out of place has been described, but in FIG. 40, an example of an effect that is won (winning) after a super reach effect is described.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 40 (A): Similarly, in the same manner, the lines of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, up) The scrolling display effect is started as if scrolling from the bottom to the bottom.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
In FIG. 40 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a chance of winning is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the possibility of winning may increase to reach”.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 40 (C): After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further from the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) to be hit by this change by making the change in the aspect of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach reach to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 40 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 40 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” is stopped at the right position of the screen, the Chinese numeral “seven”-“in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Reach state of “Fluctuating”-“Seven” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed.

  After the reach state occurs, the super reach effect is executed. In the super reach production, only the production symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, the Chinese numeral “seven”) are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect design may be displayed in a reduced state at each corner of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 40, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 40 (G): following the notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing arithmetic numbers “1” to “8” are displayed in a three-dimensional sequence on the screen, There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “1”, “2”, “3”,. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the arithmetic number “7” remains “unerased” until the end. Also, when the arithmetic number “6” is deleted and the arithmetic number “7” remains in front of the screen, it is “hit”, but when the arithmetic number “7” is deleted, it is “out of”. It means that there is. In this case, for example, “8” as the arithmetic number is displayed on the screen after the arithmetic number “7” is deleted. Therefore, during this period, the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”,... Are deleted in order, and as the order of the numbers “5” approaches, the player's Tension and expectation will also increase. After this, for example, if up to the arithmetic number “5” is erased on the screen, then the next time the Chinese numeral “6” is erased, the possibility of “winning” will increase, so there is a game there. A person's tension increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 40 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it is split into a large image, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this point, for example, the content of the reach production is “If the arithmetical number“ 6 ”is deleted, then“ seven ”-“ 7 ”-“ seven ”will increase the chance of a normal symbol” ” is there. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear large at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a hit”.

[Result display effect]
In FIG. 40 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. In this example, since it corresponds to “winning” internally, the effect design representing the arithmetical number “7” is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen, so that the effect design is “seven”-“ 7 ”-“ Seven ”is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 40 (J): For example, the confirmed stop display is also performed for the result display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the fixed stop display of the normal symbol. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a fixed stop display, it is possible to teach the player that “per normal symbol” has been fixed in the production. However, in the present embodiment, since the hit of the normal symbol (operation lottery) does not guarantee the above [F19] high probability or [F31] time shortage, it is the content that appeals “winning” too much. Not. In other words, the “three-piece” image is relaxed to some extent by setting the display pattern of the medium effect symbol to a numerical value different from the left effect symbol and the medium effect symbol.

  FIGS. 41 to 50 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects related to prefetch effects and step-up notice effects executed over a plurality of variations. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along with examples of effects.

[Operating memory increase effect]
41 (A): Since one game memory is newly added due to the passing of the game ball through the middle start gate 20 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, that is, during the fluctuation display effect by the effect symbol, the display screen One new marker M1 is added to the lower band-like region, and a total of four markers are displayed. Thereby, an increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) can be easily taught to the player.

[Prefetching]
Further, when one marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol operation memory is added, a pre-reading effect is executed in which a balloon image MP displaying “female character” appears above the new marker M1. Here, the “female character” displayed in the balloon image MP represents the “female character” in the category corresponding to the seventh symbol in the symbol pattern of the production symbol described in FIG. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a sense of expectation that “the new working memory may be a special change”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 41 (B): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out of) manner, the stop display effect is similarly performed in the non-winning (out of) state of the effect design. In other words, in the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the production symbols is a gap between “four”-“1”-“five”, so that it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to a normal “miss”. Yes. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 41 (C): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of four) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, one of the oldest working memories is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, since the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the number of displayed markers M1 decreases by one, and the remaining three markers M1 are left by one each. There is an effect that shifts in the direction. In addition, in response to the effect of the marker M1 shifting, the effect of shifting the balloon image MP displaying “female character” associated with the marker M1 by one in the left direction is performed.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 42 (D): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral is “1” and the category is “cat character” is stopped at the middle position of the screen.

[Step-up notice effect (first stage)]
In addition, a notice effect is displayed in which an image different from the effect symbol is displayed on the screen. In this example, two images have appeared: an image showing a situation where a “female character” corresponding to the number “7” of the production symbol is standing, and an image that is slightly smaller than the image. In addition, “ST1” is written in the upper left corner of the image representing the appearance of this “female character”, and “ST2” is written in the other image. This represents a notice effect (step-up notice effect) in which the aspect changes in a plurality of stages.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 42 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the production symbols is “1”-“2”-“5”, which means that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out”. Therefore, the notice effect executed at the time of displaying the variation of the normal symbol indicates that it is finished at the first stage.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 42 (F): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of three) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, one of the oldest working memories is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, as the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the display number of the marker M1 decreases by one in conjunction with this, and the remaining two markers M1 are left by one each. There is an effect that shifts in the direction. In addition, in response to the effect of the marker M1 shifting, the effect of shifting the balloon image MP displaying “female character” associated with the marker M1 by one in the left direction is performed.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 43 (G): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral “6” and the category “Panda character” are stopped at the middle position of the screen is shown.

[Step-up notice effect (first stage)]
Also, a notice effect is executed in the screen. In this example, a “female character” corresponding to the number “7” of the production symbol is shown standing, “ST1” and an image written in the upper left corner, and “ST2” that is slightly smaller than the image. And two images shown in the upper left corner appear.
[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 43 (H): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numerals are “four” and the category is “the lantern ghost” is stopped at the middle position of the screen.

[Step-up notice effect (second stage)]
In addition, a notice effect in which the aspect changes in the second stage in the screen is executed. In this example, the same “female character” as in the first stage shows the treasure box found, and the contents of the first stage are displayed on the left side of the screen, centered on the image labeled “ST2” in the upper left corner. This shows that three images, that is, a slightly smaller image, “ST3” that is slightly smaller on the right side of the screen, and an image written in the upper left corner have appeared.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 43 (I): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of performance symbols is “6”-“3”-“four”, so the fact that the current variation corresponds to a normal “out” is expressed in the production. Therefore, the notice effect executed at the time of the variation display of the normal symbol this time indicates that the second stage is finished.

  In addition, at this stage, the notice effect with “female character” of the same category is executed twice in succession, and the pre-reading effect with “female character” of the same category associated with the working memory is executed. Represents. Thereby, it can be made to suggest that the effect regarding the “female character” corresponding to the number “7” of the effect symbol is frequently executed.

[Next fluctuation start]
44 (J): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (two in total) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. Further, since the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed decreases by one in conjunction with this, and the remaining one marker M1 moves to the left by one. There is an effect to shift. In addition, in response to the effect of the marker M1 shifting, the effect of shifting the balloon image MP displaying “female character” associated with the marker M1 by one in the left direction is performed.

[Step-up notice effect (first stage)]
In FIG. 44 (K): Immediately after the start of fluctuation, a notice effect is executed in the screen. In this example, a “female character” corresponding to the number “7” of the production symbol is shown standing, “ST1” and an image written in the upper left corner, and “ST2” that is slightly smaller than the image. And two images shown in the upper left corner appear.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 44 (L): When a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral “5” and the category “Sennin no Character” are stopped in the middle position of the screen.

[Step-up notice effect (second stage)]
In addition, a notice effect in which the aspect changes in the second stage in the screen is executed. In this example, the same “female character” as in the first stage shows the treasure box found, and the contents of the first stage are displayed on the left side of the screen, centered on the image labeled “ST2” in the upper left corner. This shows that three images, that is, a slightly smaller image, “ST3” that is slightly smaller on the right side of the screen, and an image written in the upper left corner have appeared.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 45 (M): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral “6” and the category “Panda character” are stopped at the middle position of the screen is shown.

[Step-up notice effect stage 3)]
In addition, a notice effect in which the aspect changes in the third stage is executed in the screen. In this example, the same “female character” as in the first and second stages has opened the treasure box, and the contents of the second stage are displayed on the left side of the screen, centered on the image labeled “ST3” in the upper left corner. This shows that three images, that is, a slightly smaller image representing the above, an image represented by “ST4” that is slightly smaller on the right side of the screen, and an image described in the upper left corner, have appeared.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 45 (N): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of effect symbols is “5”-“2”-“six”, so that it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of”. Therefore, the notice effect executed at the time of the variation display of the normal symbol this time indicates that it is finished at the third stage.

  In addition, at this stage, the notice effect by “female character” of the same category is executed three times in succession, and the pre-reading effect by “female character” of the same category associated with the working memory is still executed. It represents that. Thereby, about the fluctuation | variation linked | related by the next prefetch effect, a player can have a feeling of expectation more than usual. Further, in the next fluctuation, when the notice effect by the “female character” corresponding to the number “7” of the effect symbol is executed once more, it is possible to make the expectation for further jackpot more than usual.

[Next fluctuation start]
45 (O): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there is one working memory corresponding to the normal symbol in this state, one of the working memories is consumed, and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, since the number of working memories of normal symbols decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, an effect is produced in which the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. In addition, an effect that consumes the balloon image MP on which “female character” associated with the marker M1 is displayed corresponds to the effect that the marker M1 is reduced (consumed) by one.

[Step-up notice effect (first stage)]
In FIG. 46 (P): Immediately after the start of fluctuation, a notice effect is executed in the screen. In this example, a “female character” corresponding to the number “7” of the production symbol is shown standing, “ST1” and an image written in the upper left corner, and “ST2” that is slightly smaller than the image. And two images shown in the upper left corner appear.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 46 (Q): When a certain amount of time has elapsed, the left effect symbol first stops changing. In this example, the effect design indicating that the Chinese numerals are “seven” and the category is “female character” is stopped at the middle position of the screen.

[Step-up notice effect (second stage)]
In addition, a notice effect in which the aspect changes in the second stage in the screen is executed. In this example, the same “female character” as in the first stage shows the treasure box found, and the contents of the first stage are displayed on the left side of the screen, centered on the image labeled “ST2” in the upper left corner. This shows that three images, that is, a slightly smaller image, “ST3” that is slightly smaller on the right side of the screen, and an image written in the upper left corner have appeared.

[Step-up notice effect (3rd stage)]
In FIG. 46 (R): Thereafter, a notice effect in which the aspect changes in the third stage is executed in the screen. In this example, the same “female character” as in the first and second stages has opened the treasure box, and the contents of the second stage are displayed on the left side of the screen, centered on the image labeled “ST3” in the upper left corner. This shows that three images, that is, a slightly smaller image representing the above, an image represented by “ST4” that is slightly smaller on the right side of the screen, and an image described in the upper left corner, have appeared.

[Step-up notice effect (4th stage)]
In FIG. 47 (S): After that, a notice effect in which the aspect changes in the fourth stage is executed in the screen. In this example, an image written as “VS” appears from the same treasure box as in the first to third stages, and “ST4” is centered on the image written in the upper left corner, and 3 on the left side of the screen. It shows that two small images representing the contents of the stage have appeared. Therefore, it represents that an image suggesting “battle reach” has appeared. Since there is no image labeled “ST5” on the right side of the image representing the fourth stage, this fourth stage is the final stage, and a step-up notice effect that changes in a series of stages. Represents the completion.

  In addition, since the step-up notice effect that has been continuously executed from before the three changes is also executed in the current change, the player can have a great expectation for the big hit. Further, when the step-up notice effect is executed one step ahead of the previous time every time a new change is made, that is, before the third change, the first step is executed. Executed in the mode up to the eye, executed in the mode up to the third stage before the first change, and executed in the mode up to the final stage in the change corresponding to the pre-reading effect, so that each time one change is made to the player I was able to have a great sense of expectation for the jackpot.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 47 (T): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” is stopped at the right position of the screen, the reach state of the Chinese numeral “seven”-“changing”-“seven” is displayed on the screen. It has occurred. Therefore, an aspect representing the number “7” corresponding to “female character”, which is the same category as the step-by-step notice effect (step-up notice) that has been continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuations so far. This means that you have reached reach.

  In FIG. 47 (U): After the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 48, (V): After the reach state has occurred, for example, the same category as the notice effect (step-up notice effect) that changes stepwise has been executed continuously over a plurality of fluctuations so far. An image representing a “female character” as a group passes through the screen from right to left, and a post-reach notice effect (group notice effect) is performed. Executing such a notice after the occurrence of reach suggests that the “female character” is advantageous in the future battle reach, and has the effect of giving the player even greater expectations. It is done.

[Battle Reach Production Start]
In FIG. 48 (W): A battle reach effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is started among reach effects. In this example, text information such as “Battle start!” Is displayed on the screen, and the same “female character” as the contents of the pre-reading and notice effects that have been executed so far appears on the left side of the screen. On the right side of the screen? And the character information such as “VS” is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that a “female character” and any character confront each other.

  Further, at the upper left corner position in the screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“seven”-“changing”-“seven”), and at the lower right corner position, the fourth symbol Z1 relating to the normal symbol. Indicates that the variable is still displayed.

  In FIG. 48 (X): When the battle reach production progresses, a female character wearing a different hat from the “female character” corresponding to the number “7” in the production design appears, and “If you win the battle, you ’ll A production that produces a dialogue such as "Battle!" Thereby, if the result of the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to the winning, the battle can be won, and further, the player can be instructed that the Janken battle related to the next special symbol can be started.

  In FIG. 49 (Y): Battle reach production further proceeds, for example, “Panda character” appears, and the production of the line “Game! By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed that the opponent who battles the “female character” is the “panda character” corresponding to the number “6” of the effect symbol.

  49 (Z): For example, “female character” appears on the left side of the screen, “panda character” appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect by two characters will be started.

  In FIG. 49 (a): After this, the battle reach effect will proceed concretely. In the example shown in the figure, the “female character” takes out the drum (weapon) and directs the drum toward the “panda character”.

  (B) in FIG. 50: Subsequently, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the “panda character” in this state, you win.

[When not winning]
FIG. 50 (c): When the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect is performed in which “Panda characters” dodge the wave fired from the drum well.

  (D) in FIG. 50: After that, when “Panda character” is displayed large together with the characters “Defeat ....” and “Female character” is displayed small, it is determined that the player is out of place (non-winning). Is transmitted to. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbols are reduced (“seven”-“6”-“seven”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state.

  FIG. 50 (e): Thereafter, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes.

[When winning]
(F) in FIG. 50: On the other hand, if the special symbol changes this time, the “Panda Character” will be waved, causing an explosion and causing the “Panda Character” to be moved far away. Production is performed.

  In FIG. 50 (g): After that, when the characters “Victory !!” are displayed with a large “female character” and “Panda characters” are displayed small, the player is determined to be a big hit (winning). Communicated. In addition, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced state (“seven”-“7”-“seven”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state.

  FIG. 50 (h): After that, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbols is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes (“seven”-“7”-“seven”).

  In the above, when the action memory is acquired, the look-ahead image MP is displayed in association with the marker M1 corresponding to the action memory, in which the category corresponding to the number “7” of the effect symbol is “female character” Production was being performed. In addition, when the change is different from the change associated with the pre-reading effect, a step-by-step notice effect (step-up notice effect) that changes in stages related to the “female character” of the same category as the pre-reading effect is generated multiple times. Was running over the fluctuations. In addition, the announcement effect is also executed by changing to a mode in which the level is increased in the previous change so that the effect is executed in the last-stage mode at the time of the change. In this way, the look-ahead effect in the same category or the notice effect that changes in stages suggests what kind of reach effect will be executed in the fluctuation, gradually increasing the expectation level for the big hit, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the. Next, the notice effect different from the notice effect that changes in stages will be described.

  FIGS. 51 to 59 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects related to prefetch effects and dialogue notice effects executed over a plurality of variations. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along with examples of effects.

[Operating memory increase effect]
In FIG. 51 (A): Since one game memory is newly added due to the passing of the game ball through the middle start gate 20 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, that is, during the fluctuation display effect by the effect symbol, the display screen One new marker M1 is added to the lower band-like region, and a total of four markers are displayed. Thereby, an increase in the number of working memories and the number of them (the number of working memories) can be easily taught to the player.

[Prefetching]
Further, when one marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol operation memory is added, a pre-reading effect in which a balloon image MP with “?” Displayed on the new marker M1 appears is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a sense of expectation that “the new working memory may be a special change”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 51 (B): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out of) manner, the stop display effect is similarly performed in the non-winning (out of) state of the effect design. That is, in the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the production symbols is a gap between “seven”-“5”-“eight”, and it is expressed on the production that the current variation corresponds to a normal “out of”. Yes. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 51 (C): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of four) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, one of the oldest working memories is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, since the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the number of displayed markers M1 decreases by one, and the remaining three markers M1 are left by one each. There is an effect that shifts in the direction.

[Change image display for pre-reading effects]
In addition, in response to the effect of the marker M1 shifting, an effect of shifting the balloon image MP associated with the marker M1 by one in the left direction is performed. Here, an effect is performed in which the display is changed to “!” For the balloon image MP that was previously displayed as “?”. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the degree of expectation of jackpot in the fluctuation related to the prefetching effect has increased.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 52 (D): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral “2” and the category “cat character” are stopped at the middle position of the screen is shown.

[Dialogue notice effect (level 1)]
In addition, a notice effect is displayed in which an image different from the effect symbol is displayed on the screen. In this example, a female announcer character that does not correspond to any of the numbers in the production pattern appears, and the production is announced with a speech such as “What do you like about the hermit?” Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an effect related to the “Sennin Character” will be executed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 52 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the production symbols is “2”-“2”-“five”, so it is expressed on the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of”. Therefore, in the notice effect produced when displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol, it indicates that the level 1 content, that is, the content with the low degree of expectation of jackpot is finished.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 52 (F): When the normal symbol stop display time elapses, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (a total of three) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, one of the oldest working memories is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, as the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the display number of the marker M1 decreases by one in conjunction with this, and the remaining two markers M1 are left by one each. There is an effect that shifts in the direction.

[Change image display for pre-reading effects]
In addition, in response to the effect of the marker M1 shifting, an effect of shifting the balloon image MP associated with the marker M1 by one in the left direction is performed. Here, an effect is performed in which the display is changed to “!!” for the balloon image MP that has been displayed as “!”. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the degree of expectation of jackpot in the fluctuation related to the prefetching effect has further increased.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 53 (G): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral is “3” and the category is “middle-aged female character” is stopped at the middle position of the screen.

[Dialogue notice effect (level 2)]
In addition, a notice effect is displayed in which an image different from the effect symbol is displayed on the screen. In this example, a female announcer character that does not correspond to any of the numbers in the production pattern appears, and the production of the announcement is performed with the line “Sennin seems to like cherry”. As a result, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that an effect related to the “Sennin Character” will be executed.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 53 (H): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the production symbols is “3”-“1”-“5”, which means that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of”. Therefore, in the notice effect produced when the change display of the normal symbol is performed, it represents that the content of the level 2, that is, the big hit expectation is finished with medium content.

  In addition, at this stage, the notice effect by the “sennin character” that is the same category is executed twice in succession, and the pre-read effect associated with the working memory is executed. Thereby, it can be made to suggest that the effect regarding the “Sennin character” corresponding to the number “5” of the effect symbol is frequently executed.

[Next fluctuation start]
53 (I): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (two in total) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. Further, since the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed decreases by one in conjunction with this, and the remaining one marker M1 moves to the left by one. There is an effect to shift.

[Change image display for pre-reading effects]
In addition, in response to the effect of the marker M1 shifting, an effect of shifting the balloon image MP associated with the marker M1 by one in the left direction is performed. Here, an effect is executed in which the display of the balloon image MP that has been displayed as “!!!!” is changed to the image of “Sennin no Character”. Thereby, the big hit expectation degree in the fluctuation related to the pre-reading effect is further increased, and the player can be instructed that the effect related to “Sennin no Character” is executed.

[Left design stop]
FIG. 54 (J): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design indicating that the Chinese numerals are “seven” and the category is “female character” is stopped at the middle position of the screen.

[Dialogue notice effect (level 3)]
In addition, a notice effect is displayed in which an image different from the effect symbol is displayed on the screen. In this example, a female announcer character that does not correspond to any of the numbers in the production design appears, and the production is announced with a speech such as “Opportunity to reach with her design!”. As a result, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that an effect related to the “Sennin Character” will be executed.

[Stop display effect]
54 (K): In synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, the variable display effect by the effect symbol is finished and the stop display effect is executed. In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the production symbols is “7”-“2”-“three”, so that the change this time corresponds to the normal “out” is expressed in the production. Therefore, in the notice effect produced when the change of the normal symbol is displayed, it indicates that the level 3 content, that is, the content with the high expectation degree of jackpot is finished.

  In addition, at this stage, the notice effect by “Sennin Character” of the same category is executed three times in succession, and the pre-reading effect by “Sennin Character” of the same category associated with the working memory is executed. It represents that. Thereby, it can be made to suggest that the effect regarding the “Sennin character” corresponding to the number “5” of the effect symbol is frequently executed. Further, in the next fluctuation, when the notice effect by the “Sennin character” corresponding to the number “5” of the effect symbol is executed once more, it is possible to make the expectation for the further big hit more than usual.

[Next fluctuation start]
54 (L): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there is one working memory corresponding to the normal symbol in this state, one of the working memories is consumed, and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, since the number of working memories of normal symbols decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, an effect is produced in which the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this. In addition, the effect that the marker M1 is reduced (consumed) by one is consumed, and the effect that is consumed is also executed for the balloon image MP in which the “sennin character” associated with the marker M1 is displayed.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 55 (M): When a certain amount of time has elapsed, the left effect symbol first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol indicating that the Chinese numeral “5” and the category “Sennin no Character” are stopped in the middle position of the screen.

[Drama notice effect (level 4)]
In addition, a notice effect is displayed in which an image different from the effect symbol is displayed on the screen. In this example, a female announcer character that does not correspond to any of the numbers in the production pattern appears, and the production is announced with a speech such as “Sennin seems to be revived in battle!”. This will give the player a sense of expectation that a battle production in which the “Sennin Character” appears will be executed, and that a resurgence production (special reach production) will also be executed in the battle production. You can hold them.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 55 (N): Next to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, the reach state of the Chinese numeral “5”-“Fluctuating”-“5” is displayed on the screen. It has occurred. Therefore, in a manner that represents the number “5” corresponding to “Sennin no Kyo”, which is the same category as the content of the dialogue announcement effect by the female announcer character that has been continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuations so far Reach state is reached.

  In addition, after the reach state occurs, a character image such as “reach” is displayed together. Thereby, it can appeal to the player that the reach state has occurred. Further, at this time, a sound such as “reach” may be output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 55 (O): After the reach state has occurred, for example, “Sennin Character”, which is the same category as the content of the dialogue notice effect that has been continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuations so far, is displayed. After reaching, a notice effect (group notice effect) is performed in which the images to be displayed form a group and pass on the screen from right to left. By performing such a notice after the occurrence of reach, it has been suggested that the “Sennin Character” will be advantageous in the future battle reach, which has the effect of giving the player even greater expectations. can get.

[Battle Reach Production Start]
In FIG. 56 (P): A battle reach production with a high expectation degree of big hit is started among reach productions. In this example, text information such as “Battle Start!” Is displayed on the screen, and the same “Sennin Character” as the contents of the look-ahead effect and the notice effect that has been executed so far appears on the left side of the screen. And on the right side of the screen? And the character information such as “VS” is displayed. Thus, the player can be instructed that any character is confronted with the “Sennin character”.

  Further, at the upper left corner position in the screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("five"-"fluctuating"-"five"), and at the lower right corner position, the fourth symbol Z1 relating to the normal symbol. Indicates that the variable is still displayed.

  Also, although not shown, when the battle reach production progresses, an effect that produces a dialogue such as “If you win the battle, it ’s Janken Battle !!” is executed. Thereby, if the result of the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to the winning, the battle can be won, and further, the player can be instructed that the Janken battle related to the next special symbol can be started.

  In FIG. 56 (Q): Battle reach production further progresses, for example, “Umbrella ghost” appears, and the production “Sound is a game!” Is produced. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed that the opponent who battles with “Sennin no Character” is “ghost of umbrella” corresponding to the number “2” of the effect symbol.

  In FIG. 56 (R): For example, “Sennin character” appears on the right side of the screen, “Umbrella ghost” appears on the left side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. An appearance that appears. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect by two characters will be started.

  In FIG. 57 (S): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which “Sennin Character” attacks with a wand and “Haunted Umbrella” attacks with a bell.

  In FIG. 57 (T): After that, along with the characters “defeated ...”, “ghost of umbrella” is displayed large, and an effect that “Sennin no Character” is distant is executed. As a result, the player can be informed that the game may have been lost (not won). Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced (“5” − “2” − “5”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state. Therefore, it means that it is not actually out of place.

[Result of Battle Reach Production]
In FIG. 57 (U): After that, “Battle Reach Production” has progressed, and the state where “Sennin Character” has fallen on its face is expressed. Therefore, the player can be informed of the result of defeating the battle.

[Revariation start]
Here, at the position of the upper left corner of the screen, the effect design that has been paused starts to change again (“five” − “↓ (fluctuating)” − “five”). Therefore, for the brewer's player, it is not actually off-line, and it can be confirmed that the special symbol is in a changing state.

[Special reach production (revival reach production)]
58 (V): The image of the effect switching button 45 and the image of the cherry are displayed on the left side of the “Sennin character” lying prone, and the player presses the pressing of the effect switching button 45. Prompt performance is performed. In addition, an effect is displayed in which a message such as “Resurrend the hermit by pressing the button repeatedly!” Is displayed. Thus, the player can be instructed to revive the “Sennin character” with his favorite “cherry”.

[When winning]
58 (W): If the special symbol changes this time, the effect that the revived “Sennin Character” appears will be executed when the effect switching button 45 is repeatedly hit. Is done. At this time, an image showing a state where lightning or explosion has occurred is also displayed as a background image.

[When not winning]
In addition, although not shown in the drawing, when not winning, an effect is displayed in which a message such as “Sorry…” is displayed on the left side of the “Sennin Character” lying down on its face.

  In FIG. 58 (X): After that, an effect is performed in which the staff possessed by the “Sennin character” is swung around and the “ghost of the umbrella” is played.

  In FIG. 59 (Y): Then, a victory effect is executed. Specifically, “Sennin no Character” is displayed together with the characters “Victory”, and the player is informed of the big hit (winning).

  In FIG. 59 (Z): Thereafter, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes ("5"-"5"-"5").

  In the above, when the working memory is acquired, the prefetch effect is displayed in which the balloon image MP displayed as “?” Is displayed in association with the marker M1 corresponding to the working memory. As for the pre-reading effect, each time another change is started until the change corresponding to the pre-reading effect is started, the display of the balloon image MP is “!”, “!!” The look-ahead effect was being executed while the category corresponding to “5” was changed to the image of “Sennin no Character”. Furthermore, at the time of a variation different from the variation corresponding to the prefetching effect, the dialogue notice effect of the content related to the “sennin character” in the same category as the prefetching effect was executed over a plurality of variations. In addition, the announcement effect is also executed in such a manner that the jackpot expectation is increased in order so that the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the highest jackpot expectation at the time of the change. In this way, the look-ahead effect by the same category or the dialogue notice effect suggests what kind of reach effect will be executed in the fluctuation, gradually increasing the expectation for the big hit, and reducing the interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the two types of notice effects, that is, the step-up notice effect and the dialogue notice effect have been specifically described. However, the present invention is not limited to these notice effects. For other notice effects as well, when the pre-read effects are executed, the notice effects that are unified to “characters” of a predetermined category are executed over a plurality of fluctuations. May be.

  For example, a pseudo-continuous change notice effect may be executed in which the change ends and the next change starts, such as the change display effect by the effect symbol being temporarily stopped and the re-change being started by the “character”. Specifically, assuming that operation memory for three times is stored before the change corresponding to the pre-reading effect, during the first change, an effect by a predetermined “character” is performed once. The pseudo continuous fluctuation notice effect is executed as if the two fluctuations were performed. During the second variation, a pseudo continuous variation notice effect is performed as if the variation by the same “character” is performed twice, as if the variation has been performed three times. Similarly, during the third variation, a pseudo continuous variation notice effect is performed as if the variation by the same “character” is performed three times, as if four variations have been performed. Then, during the variation corresponding to the pre-reading effect, a pseudo continuous variation notice effect is performed as if the variation by five times was performed by performing the effect by the same “character” four times. In this way, by unifying the “characters” in the same category and executing the same pseudo-variable change notice effect, it is suggested what reach effect is executed in the change as described above. In addition, the expectation for the big hit can be gradually increased, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 60 to 63 are continuous diagrams showing examples of the notice effect that is executed when the background image changes. Hereinafter, an example of the specific notice effect executed when the background image related to the stay mode representing the gaming state at the time when the effect is executed is displayed. Here, the unique notice effect represents a notice effect related to the stay mode (background image), and represents that a unique notice effect is prepared for each stay mode.

[Coast mode]
In FIG. 60 (A): For example, the “normal mode” representing the normal state in which the variable time shortening function described above is inactive and the probability variable function is also inactive (in this example, “coast mode”). ), A variable display effect in which three effect symbols are scroll-changed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 is executed. In the “coast mode”, a background image of a landscape with “sandy beach”, “sea”, “island” and the like as a motif is displayed.

[Inherent notice production ("coast mode")]
In addition, in the fluctuation during the “coast mode”, a specific notice effect corresponding to the “coast mode” in which a yacht in which the character “chance?” Is displayed on the mast appears is executed. Therefore, if there is a normal notice effect used in many modes (background images) such as the step-up notice effect, the line notice effect, and the group notice effect described above, there is a unique notice used according to the mode as described above. This means that there is also a production.

[Stop display effect]
(B) in FIG. 60: Thereafter, the last medium effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. When the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out of) manner, the stop display effect is similarly performed in the non-winning (out of) state. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the effect symbol representing the arithmetic number “2” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the effect symbol combination is “four”-“2”-“six”. Since this is a gap of “”, it is expressed in the production that the variation this time corresponds to the normal “falling”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Stage change production]
(C) in FIG. 60: In addition, a stage change effect in which the background image changes is executed during normal symbol stop display. In this example, an effect of changing from a coastal background image representing “coast mode” to a background image of a landscape in which another female character is relaxing indoors is executed. That is, the stage (mode) has changed from “coast mode” to “indoor mode”.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 61 (D): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories (two in total) corresponding to the normal symbols in this state, the oldest working memory is consumed and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. Further, since the number of memory of normal symbols decreases by one as the change starts, the number of markers M1 displayed decreases by one in conjunction with this, and the remaining one marker M1 moves to the left by one. There is an effect to shift.

[Inherent notice effect ("Indoor mode") (Part 1)]
In FIG. 61 (E): In addition, in the fluctuation in the “indoor mode”, the door in the room is zoomed up, and an image imitating the effect switching button 45 appears, and the player presses the press of the effect switching button. The effect taught is executed. That is, a specific notice effect corresponding to the “indoor mode” is started.

[Inherent notice effect ("Indoor mode") (Part 2)]
FIG. 61 (F): Then, when the player presses down the effect switching button 45 (or when the effective time corresponding to the pressing of the effect switching button 45 has elapsed), the indoor door opens, From there, there will be a performance in which a female character uttering the line “Maybe there ’s a good thing!” Appears. Therefore, this effect also represents a specific notice effect corresponding to the “indoor mode”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 62 (G): Thereafter, the last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol. When the result of the current operation lottery is non-winning, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out of) manner, the stop display effect is similarly performed in the non-winning (out of) state. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the effect symbol representing the arithmetic numeral “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “eight”-“3”-“two”. Since this is a gap of “”, it is expressed in the production that the variation this time corresponds to the normal “falling”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Stage change production]
In FIG. 62 (H): A stage change effect in which the background image changes is executed while the normal symbol is stopped. In this example, an effect of changing from a background image of a female character relaxing in a room representing “indoor mode” to a background image of a landscape representing Noyama is executed. That is, the stage (mode) has changed from “indoor mode” to “noyama mode”.

[Next fluctuation start]
62 (I): When the normal symbol stop display time has elapsed, the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. Here, since there is one working memory corresponding to the normal symbol in this state, one of the working memories is consumed, and the next normal symbol variation display is started. With the start of the next fluctuation, the left, middle, and right production symbols have all started to display fluctuation. In addition, since the number of working memories of normal symbols decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, an effect is produced in which the number of displayed markers M1 is decreased by one in conjunction with this.

[Inherent notice production ("Noyama mode")]
(J) in FIG. 63: In addition, in the fluctuation in the “Noyama mode”, a female character on the car appears, and an effect that produces a dialogue such as “May be good!” Is executed. That is, a specific notice effect corresponding to the “Noyama mode” is started.

[Generation of reach condition]
In FIG. 63 (K): Thereafter, the variable display of the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the production symbol representing the Chinese numeral “seven” is stopped at the right position of the screen, the reach state of the Chinese numeral “seven”-“changing”-“seven” is displayed on the screen. It has occurred. Then, the reach effect described above is executed.

  As described above, it has been explained that a specific notice effect corresponding to the stay mode may be executed. Thus, if there is a notice effect (step-up notice effect, dialogue notice effect, group notice effect, etc.) that does not correspond to the mode (stage) (background image) in the notice effect, there is a unique effect corresponding to each of a plurality of types of modes. This means that there are multiple types of notice effects. In addition, when the working memory is acquired (before the change is started), the notice effect corresponding to the stay mode is selected and set in the first determination, and then the stage change effect is executed (changed to another mode). In this case, in the change, a notice effect corresponding to the stay mode at the time of change is executed without executing the notice effect corresponding to another mode selected in the previous determination.

[Direction when variable start winning device is activated]
Next, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed when [F4] variable start winning device is operated.

  FIG. 64 (A): In this example, for example, a female character appears in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and a right-handed suggestion effect that produces a speech such as “Please right-hand!” Is performed. In addition, a speech balloon image in which dialogue is written is displayed, and an arrow indicating the lower right direction of the board surface is displayed therein. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-hand” and to be aware that the operation of the variable start winning device 28 is started. At this time, sound may be generated from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 in accordance with the display of the dialogue as character information on the display screen.

  In FIG. 64 (B): After the right-handed suggestion effect, an effect in which the female character emits a dialogue such as “If you win the Janken Battle, enter the chance zone!” Is performed. As a result, the player can be instructed that the mode to be transferred is different depending on the victory or defeat of the “Janken Battle” that will be performed later, and when it wins, it will shift to an advantageous mode such as “Chance Zone”. This can be taught to the player.

  FIG. 64 (C): After that, when a game ball enters the active variable start winning device 28 and the change of the special symbol is started, characters such as “Janken Battle Start!” Are displayed on the screen. An effect is displayed in which the displayed image is displayed.

[Direction when special symbol changes]
FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed when the above [F7] special symbol changes (within the fluctuation time). In this example, a game flow is assumed in which a winning is performed with a probability of 1/2 from a special symbol variation of [F7] and proceeding to either a probability variation symbol 1, 2 winning of [F16] or a normal winning of [F11]. Yes.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), at the beginning of this production, images of female characters (left side) and enemy characters (right side) of the allies are displayed side by side, A state where sparks are scattered in the middle is expressed stunningly by moving images. Further, by appropriately displaying characters such as “game” on the display screen, it is possible to remind the player that “the game of two players will finally begin”. Further, at this time, the dialogue of each character (for example, “absolutely win!”, “Please come!”, Etc.) may be output as sound. In this case, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the content of the dialogue (the more the content of the dialogue is more positive, the higher the degree of expectation).

  In FIG. 65 (E): In the middle of the production, the two characters disappear from the display screen and the character information “Janken” is displayed large. As a result, it is possible to remind the player of the notion that “characters are fighting against each other”. In addition, it may be a mode in which a shout, sound effect, BGM, etc., such as “Janken de match” are output as sound.

  In FIG. 65 (F): In the middle stage of the production, two characters display a moving image with the content “Janken's hand out”. In this example, a series of situations from the left side of the screen to the appearance of the friendly character's hand “Choki” and the appearance of the enemy character's hand “par” from the right side of the screen are represented. At this time, in accordance with the movement of each character, a mode in which a shout such as “Janken-pon!” Is output as sound.

  In FIG. 66 (G): At the end of the production, it is displayed that the ally character has won a brilliant victory as a result of the game. In this example, the ally-winning character is a close-up in the center of the display screen, and the appearance of showing the victory V-sign beside the face is expressed in a stunning manner. In addition, by displaying the characters “I won!” On the display screen, the player can be reminded of the idea of “winning Janken”.

  In FIG. 66 (H): After winning the Janken battle, a female character appears, and an effect is displayed in which an image in which characters such as “chance zone entry!” Is displayed is displayed. As a result, it can be taught that “the transition to probability change has been confirmed at this big hit”.

  In FIG. 66 (I): An effect in which a female character emits a dialogue such as “Please make a right strike as it is!” And an effect in which an arrow indicating the right direction on the board is displayed are executed. Thereby, it can be taught that the game method when the mode is the “chance zone” is a method of causing the game ball to flow on the right side of the board surface. Therefore, the game method in the “chance zone” is a game method in which the game ball is passed through the right start gate 21 or the game ball is entered (winning) in the variable start winning device 28 or the variable winning device 30. It can be suggested to the player.

[Examples of special symbols when not selected]
FIG. 67 is a continuous diagram showing an example of effects executed when the special symbol changes (within the change time) when not entering the chance zone. Specifically, in the case of proceeding from [F7] special symbol variation to [F8] non-winning, for example, the following effects are executed.

  In FIG. 67 (J): In this example, a series of states from the left of the screen until the friendly character's hand “Choki” appears and from the right of the screen the enemy character's hand “Goo” appears. It is expressed.

  In FIG. 67 (K): It is displayed that, as a result of the match, unfortunately the ally character has been defeated. In this example, the defeated ally character becomes a close-up in the center of the display screen, and the state of disappointment is expressed in a stunning manner. In addition, by displaying the letters “Lose ...” in the display screen, the player is reminded of the idea that “Janken was defeated”. Can't be taught ".

  In FIG. 67 (L): After that, an effect in which a female character emits a dialogue such as “Please return to the left!” And an effect in which an arrow indicating the left direction of the board is displayed are executed. Thereby, it can be taught that the mode returns to the “normal mode” and the game method returns to the method of causing the game ball to flow on the left side of the board surface.

[Direction during certain change]
Next, FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed when the game flow proceeds during the probability change of [F19] from the operation of [F18] variable winning device. Here, although “probability changing effect” is used, it may be an example of an effect executed when the game flow progresses to a chance zone that combines [F19] probability change and [F31] time.

  68 (A): For example, when the variable winning device [F18] is operated, for example, “right-handed” character information is displayed together with the background image on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the game area 8a is displayed. An arrow symbol indicating the right side portion of is displayed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “right-hand” and to be aware that a winning accompanying the opening operation of the variable winning device 30 occurs. At this time, the background image represents, for example, a state in which a female character who has won in the previous production example is sitting relaxed.

  In addition, a limiter remaining number meter (reference symbol M) corresponding to the remaining “limiter count”, for example, is displayed at the lower position in the screen. The limiter remaining number meter M displays the “limiter count” at the present time. Is displayed in a bar graph-like manner. In this example, in the rectangular frame of the limiter remaining number meter M, the number of “limiter times” is 17 (maximum 18 times) in the state where 17 vertically long blocks except one at the right end thereof are lit. Represents. After this, when the game flow progresses during [F19] variable change from [F18] variable winning device operation, the limiter remaining number meter M is decremented by 1 and becomes 16 times.

[Limiter remaining meter production]
In FIG. 68 (B): While the above [F19] loop is repeated in the above-mentioned probability change, the text information of “right-handed” is continuously displayed on the screen together with the background image, and the right portion in the game area 8a is also displayed. An arrow symbol is displayed. On the other hand, the limiter remaining number meter M is displayed in such a manner that the number of lighting blocks decreases one by one every time a probability variation winning occurs. With such a display mode of the limiter remaining number meter M, the player is reminded that the remaining number of limiters that are probably changing is gradually decreasing, and the internal information used in the actual game flow. ("Limiter count") can be transmitted (taught, suggested) to the player.

[Director on limiter]
Next, FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect that is executed when a limiter addition due to normal winning during probability change occurs. However, the actual number of extra additions differs depending on the number of remaining limiters at the time of occurrence, and it is difficult for the player to visually determine at which stage the extra addition occurred. Various aspects can be considered for the presentation technique (how to show) when expressing this on the presentation.

  In FIG. 69, (A): For example, even if the “limiter count” is internally increased by 10 times, this can be divided into 5 times and the additional effect can be executed twice. In this case, an image simulating a relatively small heart shape is displayed on the screen, and information on the number of times of addition, for example, “+5” is displayed inside the image. In addition, an effect of increasing the display of the limiter remaining number meter M by 5 times is performed (not shown). Thereby, it can be transmitted to the player that “the remaining limiter count has been added five times”. After that, for example, when the limiter remaining number meter M becomes less displayed, an additional effect for five times is executed. Thereby, although the number of times of addition per production is reduced, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and surprise by generating a number of addition effects.

  In FIG. 69 (B): Alternatively, when the limiter remaining number meter M has already been displayed with a small remaining amount, an actual increase of 12 times can be expressed as an additional effect. In this case, an image simulating a relatively large heart shape is displayed on the screen, and information on the number of times of addition, for example, “+12” is displayed inside the image. In addition, an effect of increasing the display of the limiter remaining number meter M by 12 degrees at a stretch is performed (not shown). Thereby, it can be transmitted to the player that “the remaining limiter count has been added 12 times at a time”. In addition, when the limiter remaining number meter M display is low, an additional has occurred, so that the tension of “the limiter may be gone” is released, and the feeling of relief and joy due to the addition is displayed. be able to.

[Director after reaching the limiter]
Next, FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an effect example executed after reaching the limiter. For example, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 times in the game flow, the following example effects are executed.

[End production]
In FIG. 70, (A): In this case, for example, character information of “chance zone end” is displayed on the screen, and the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M becomes zero. As a result, the player is instructed to “end during probability change” and contributes to maintaining motivation for the next probability change entry.

[Continuation (revival) production]
In FIG. 70, (B): On the other hand, when the shift is made to [F31] time reduction after reaching the limiter in the actual game flow, the continuation effect is executed following the end effect. In this case, an effect of dropping the movable body 40f to the front side of the liquid crystal display 42 is performed. In addition, the appearance as if the female character in the background image is surprised at the fall of the movable body 40f is expressed in a stunning manner. Then, at the lower position in the screen, for example, an effect is performed in which the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M returns to full (full) (18). Although not particularly illustrated, the movable body 40f may return to the original position after this, and a character such as “continuation of chance zone” may be displayed on the screen, for example. In any case, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player by executing such a continuous effect. Further, by using the movable body 40f, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal and maximize the effect of the presentation.

[Background change production]
In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the “limiter count” decreases in the game flow, an effect of changing the background image according to the remaining count is performed.
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a background image that changes as the game flow progresses.

[Initial stage production]
In FIG. 71, (A): For example, in the early stage of the transition to [F19] in the game flow, the background image is the “female character wearing yukata” and this is the “initial stage”, for example. . In this case, since the content of the background image is relatively calm, it is possible to express a stable impression that has just shifted to the probability change. Although not shown here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned limiter remaining number meter M, “right-handed” character display, and the like are displayed on the display screen (the same applies hereinafter).

[Yukata stage production]
71 (B): When the remaining “limiter count” decreases to some extent as the game flow progresses (for example, the remaining 17 to 14 times), the background image is changed based on the lottery for effect control. Production is performed. In this example, for example, a large “female character wearing a yukata” is displayed on the display screen, and this is, for example, a “yukata stage”. In this way, by executing an effect (stage change effect) that changes from the “initial stage” to the “yukata stage”, the visual impact on the player is enhanced, and [F19] Can give a sense of continuity and a sense of tension.

[Fireworks stage production]
In FIG. 71 (C): When the game flow further progresses and the “limiter count” gradually decreases (for example, the remaining 8 to 5 times), the background image is further changed based on the lottery for effect control. Production is performed. In this example, for example, the display screen is changed to “Landscape of fireworks in the night sky”, and “Scenery of another female character looking up at fireworks” is displayed in a stunning manner. In the present embodiment, this is, for example, a “fireworks stage”. By executing such an effect of changing to the “fireworks stage”, it is possible to finally make the player feel that the game in the middle of [F19] probability change has reached the climax.

[Festival stage production]
In FIG. 71, (D): This example changes the background image to “festival scenery”, and in the present embodiment, this is referred to as “festival stage”. This “festival stage” represents that the remaining “number of limiters” is small (for example, 4 to 1 time). By executing such an effect to change to the “festival stage”, the player can realize that [F19] the game that is undergoing certain change is low, or add it when the limiter arrives (or before it reaches). It can make you feel nervous about whether continuation will occur.

[Director after reaching the limiter]
Next, FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of an effect that is executed when the player does not re-enter the chance zone after reaching the limiter (when returning to the normal game). For example, when the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0 times in the game flow, the following example effects are executed.

[End production]
In FIG. 72, (A): In this case, for example, the character information of “chance zone end” is displayed on the screen, and the display number of the limiter remaining number meter M becomes zero. As a result, the player is instructed to “end during probability change” and contributes to maintaining motivation for the next probability change entry.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 72 (B): In the case of shifting to [F1] normal game after reaching the limiter in the actual game flow, the game explanation effect is executed following the above-mentioned end effect. In this example, for example, a female character appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and an effect of giving a speech such as “Please return to the left” is performed. In addition, an arrow symbol indicating the left portion in the game area 8a is displayed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prompt the player to “left strike” and be aware that the chance zone has ended. At this time, sound may be generated from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 in accordance with the display of the dialogue as character information on the display screen.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. Normal symbol effect (FIGS. 40, 50, 59), variable start winning device operation effect (FIG. 64), special symbol change effect (FIGS. 65 to 67), probable change effect (FIG. 68), Limiter addition effect (FIG. 69), post-limiter effect (FIGS. 70 and 72), background change effect (FIG. 71), prefetch effects (FIGS. 41 to 45, FIGS. 51 to 54), stepwise notice effect (FIG. 44 (K) -FIG. 45 (M), etc.), dialogue notice effect (FIG. 52 (D), etc.), reach effect (FIGS. 48-50, etc.), special reach effect (FIGS. 57-59), etc. It is controlled through the control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes a command reception process (step S400), an effect symbol management process (step S402), a normal symbol post-effect effect management process (step S404), a display output process (step S405), a lamp driving process (step S406), This is a configuration including a subroutine group of an acoustic drive process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The production commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a start gate passage command, a normal operation memory number command, a start opening winning tone control command, a demonstration production command, a lottery result command, a variation pattern command, a variation There are a start command, a stop symbol command, a symbol stop command, a state designation command, a time shortening function operation number command (number cut counter number command), a limiter remaining number command, an error notification command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the normal symbol operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 performs the contents of the effect that is executed when the operation memory related to the normal symbol is newly stored, and the effect that is executed when the operation memory is consumed. Control the content of. For example, contents such as an effect on the marker M1 relating to the operation memory of the normal symbol in the screen and a pre-reading effect executed in association with the marker M1 are controlled. The contents of the normal symbol operation past effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the contents of the above-described normal symbol deviation effect (FIG. 38), normal symbol effect (FIG. 40, etc.), etc. are controlled. The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the normal symbol after-effects management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effects after winning in the normal symbol lottery (operation lottery). For example, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of effects when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, and controls the contents of effects when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. In this process, the above variable start winning device operation effect (FIG. 64), special symbol change effect (FIGS. 65 to 67), probable change effect (FIG. 68), limiter addition effect (FIG. 69), after reaching the limiter The contents of the effect (FIGS. 70 and 72) and the background change effect (FIG. 71) are controlled. In addition, pre-reading effects (FIGS. 41 to 45, FIGS. 51 to 54), stepwise notice effects (FIGS. 44 (K) to 45 (M), etc.), line notice effects (FIG. 52 (D), etc.) The contents of the reach effect (FIGS. 48 to 50, etc.) and the special reach effect (FIGS. 57 to 59) are controlled. Note that the contents of the post symbol management processing for normal symbols will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S405: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 gives basic control information of the effect contents to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) (for example, the number of working memories of normal symbols, the variable effect pattern number, the notice effect) Number, effect mode number, limiter added effect pattern number, limiter remaining number meter display number pattern number, background change effect pattern number, revival effect pattern number, end effect pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed contents of the effect (acts as various effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives the various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52, the panel lamp 53, and the like (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound drive circuit 134 about the effect contents (for example, BGM, audio data, etc. during various effects). Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. For example, random numbers for pre-reading lottery, random numbers for pre-reading effect lottery, random numbers for main notice effect category for pre-reading effects, random numbers for main notice effect category for non-pre-reading effects, random numbers for lottery for stoppage, reach effect Lottery random number, special reach production lottery randomness, production design variation display production details lottery randomness, main announcement production details lottery randomness, other announcement production lottery random numbers, stage change production execution lottery randomness, stage change production selection random number Etc.

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body solenoid 57 as a drive source, and performs an effect in synchronism with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 as described above or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1.

[Normal symbol working memory production management process]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the normal symbol operation memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S470: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of normal symbol operating memories has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not an effect command when the normal symbol operation memory number increase is newly stored. As a result of the confirmation, when the effect command at the time of increasing the number of normal symbol working memory is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S475. On the other hand, when the effect command at the time of increasing the number of normal symbol operation memory is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S480.

  Step S475: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process at the time of increasing the number of normal symbol operating memories. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect in which one new marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed on the screen. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S477.

  Step S477: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the normal symbol prefetch variation pattern command has been received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a new normal symbol look-ahead variation pattern command is stored. As a result of this confirmation, when the normal symbol prefetch variation pattern command is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S478. On the other hand, if the normal symbol prefetch variation pattern command has not been received (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S478: The effect control CPU 126 executes normal symbol prefetch effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 pre-determines the content of the effect scheduled to be executed at the time of the change based on the pre-read information command and the pre-read variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, and determines whether to execute the pre-read effect. Such as selectively determining the category of the main notice effect scheduled to be executed at the time of the change. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S480.

  Step S480: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of decreasing the number of normal symbol operating memory is received. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a new effect command when the number of normal symbol operation memory is decreased is stored. As a result of this confirmation, when the effect command at the time of decrease in the number of normal symbol working memories is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S485. On the other hand, when the effect command at the time of decrease in the number of normal symbol operating memories is not received (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

  Step S485: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process at the time of decrease in the number of ordinary symbol operating memories. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the marker M1 corresponding to the normal symbol in the screen.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 73).

[Normal symbol prefetch effect selection processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol prefetch effect selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: The effect control CPU 126 develops a normal symbol prefetch variation pattern command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the newly recorded normal symbol prefetch variation pattern command, and confirms the prefetch variation pattern number corresponding to the referenced value and the content of the variation pattern. To do. Furthermore, based on the confirmed content, whether the variation pattern is a hit pattern, whether the variation pattern content (prefetch variation pattern number) corresponds to an indefinite value or a fixed value, how many seconds the variation time is The information corresponding to whether or not the reach production is executed and whether or not the special reach production is executed is developed.

  For example, when the prefetch fluctuation pattern command is “B7H07H”, the prefetch fluctuation pattern number is “7”, and the content of the fluctuation pattern indicates “displacement fluctuation pattern 7 after reach”. Therefore, the information to be developed includes the variation pattern type “variation pattern at the time of loss”, variation pattern content “corresponds to a fixed value”, variation time “60 seconds”, and reach production “corresponds to variation to be executed” (Yes) ”, indicating that the special reach effect is“ corresponding to a change that is not executed (no) ”.

  As described above, when the information about the received normal symbol look-ahead variation pattern command is developed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the prefetch fluctuation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms the information developed in the previous step S700, and confirms whether or not the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value. If the result of this confirmation is that the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S703. On the other hand, when the prefetch variation pattern number does not correspond to the fixed value (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal symbol operation memory effect management process (FIG. 74).

  Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the stay stage during the effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms what stage (mode) is currently being produced. For example, whether it is “coast mode” ((A), (B) in FIG. 60) or “indoor mode” ((C) in FIG. 60 to (G) in FIG. 60), “Noyama mode” ( 62 (H) to 63 (K)) are checked. It should be noted that the main notice effect category in the subsequent step S716 and step S718 is determined based on the mode confirmed in this process. In addition, the reach effect executed in step S704 may be determined based on the mode confirmed in this process. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S704.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch effect scenario selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the combination of the stop display effect by the effect symbol corresponding to the stop display mode of the normal symbol scheduled to be executed at the time of the change, and sets the contents of the reach effect and the special reach effect. To do. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S706.

  Step S705: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetch effect is currently being executed. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the execution of the prefetch effect is set in the subsequent step S714 and the fluctuation corresponding to the prefetch effect is finished. As a result of the confirmation, if the prefetching effect is currently being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S718. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect is not currently being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S706.

  Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a prefetch lottery table (not shown) defined in advance in the ROM 128 by using the prefetch lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process). Thus, it is selectively determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect. Here, the prefetch effect represents an effect reflecting a pre-determination information command (result of operation lottery) or a prefetch variation pattern command (prefetch variation pattern number) before the variation is executed. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect is executed, it indicates that the pre-reading effect is executed even at the time of the change performed before the change that is the target of the pre-reading effect.

  For example, in the pre-read lottery table, the comparison value is defined as non-winning that does not execute the pre-reading effect for 0 to 200, and the comparative value 201 to 255 is determined as the winning that executes the pre-reading effect, A look-ahead lottery that determines whether the winning or non-winning by comparing with the comparison value may be executed. In addition, the pre-read lottery table to be referred to may be changed based on the pre-read information command for normal symbols (result of the operation lottery). For example, when the result of the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to winning, refer to the prefetching lottery table that is easy to select the prefetching effect for the big hit, and when it corresponds to non-winning, the execution of the prefetching effect is selected. It may be possible to refer to the prefetch lottery table for difficult off-line. Note that the prefetch lottery table to be referred to is selected based on whether the information developed in the previous step S700 is a fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting or a fluctuation pattern at the time of losing rather than the prefetching information command (result of operation lottery) May be.

  When the pre-read lottery is executed as described above, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S710.

  Step S710: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of the prefetch lottery is a win. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the result of the prefetch lottery in the previous step S706 corresponds to the winning. As a result of the confirmation, if the result of the pre-read lottery is winning (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S712. On the other hand, if the result of the pre-read lottery is not a win (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S718.

  Step S712: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch effect lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a prefetch effect lottery table (not shown) preliminarily defined in the ROM 128 using the prefetch effect lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process). By doing so, the content of the prefetch effect is selectively determined. The pre-reading effect lottery table to be referred to defines a plurality of types of detailed contents of the pre-reading effect in advance, and the content of the pre-reading effect is determined by comparing a comparison value associated with the content with a random number for prefetching effect lottery. The Rukoto.

  For example, in the pre-reading effect lottery table, by defining a plurality of image types associated with the marker M1 corresponding to the operation memory of the normal symbol, one of the plurality of types of images is selected based on the pre-reading effect lottery random value. Select. As specific image types, in addition to images such as “?”, “!”, “!!”, “chance”, “reach” (“VS reach”, “SP reach”), etc. Images of “characters” in categories corresponding to numbers are prepared. When this “character” is selected, which “character” is to be selected based on the combination at the time of the stop display effect of the effect symbol set in the previous step S704 (prefetch effect scenario selection process). May be determined. In addition, when the item related to “reach” is selected, it may be determined which image to select based on the content of the reach effect set in the previous step S704 (prefetch effect scenario selection process). .

  The prefetch effect lottery table also defines a pattern in which an image changes when a predetermined time elapses (or when a predetermined change starts or ends). For example, as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, a pattern in which an image of “female character” continues to be displayed without change until the marker M <b> 1 is consumed after the marker M <b> 1 is newly added to the screen. Alternatively, as described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, a pattern is defined in which the image changes every time a new change is started.

  In addition, regarding the contents of the prefetch effect (that is, the image displayed at the time of the prefetch effect and the pattern for displaying the image), the prefetch information command (the result of the operation lottery) of the normal symbol and the prefetch variation pattern command (prefetch variation pattern number) ) To change the selection ratio of the contents to be selected by changing the pre-reading effect lottery table to be referred to. Note that a pre-reading effect lottery table to be referred to based on whether the information developed in the previous step S700 is a fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting or a fluctuation pattern at the time of losing, instead of the pre-reading information command (result of operation lottery). You may choose.

  Here, the prefetch effect is to display the balloon image MP in association with the marker M1 corresponding to the operation memory of the normal symbol. However, the selected image is not displayed on the balloon image MP but displayed on the marker M1. May be. In other words, the pre-read effect may be obtained by changing the marker M1 to the selected image without displaying the balloon image MP. Specifically, when the pre-reading effect is not executed, a marker M1 of a circle (◯) in which nothing is written is displayed, and when the pre-reading effect is executed, “ ? ","! "," Character ", etc. In addition, the content of the pre-reading effect is not limited to the effect related to the operation memory of the normal symbol, the background image is changed to an image dedicated to the pre-reading effect, and the pre-reading special mode is used instead of the normal mode until the change of the pre-reading target is finished It is good also as an effect by (zone).

  When the pre-reading effect lottery is executed as described above, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S714.

  Step S714: The effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the prefetch effect. Specifically, a setting is made to execute the pre-reading effect based on the image displayed at the time of the pre-reading effect determined in the previous step S712 and the pattern when displaying the image. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S716.

  Step S716: The effect control CPU 126 executes main notice effect category lottery at the time of prefetch effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 uses the random numbers for the pre-reading effect main notice effect category lottery shifted in the previous step S410 (production random number update process), and the pre-reading effect main notice effect in the ROM 128 is specified in advance. By referring to the category selection table, the main notice effect category at the time of prefetch effect is selectively determined.

  Here, a plurality of prefetch effect main notice effect category selection tables corresponding to the stay stage are prepared, and the prefetch effect main notice effect category selection table corresponding to the stay stage confirmed in the previous step S703 is referred to. The Rukoto. In the pre-reading effect main notice effect category selection table, a plurality of kinds of pre-read effect main notice effect categories are defined in advance. By comparing, the main notice effect category at the time of prefetch effect is determined. For the specific pre-reading effect main notice effect category selection table, a specific example is used as the main notice effect effect lottery category, that is, together with the non-pre-reading effect notice effect category lottery table referred to when the prefetch effect is not executed. I will explain. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S720.

  Step S718: The effect control CPU 126 executes main notice effect category lottery during non-prefetch effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the random number for the main notice effect category notice lottery in the non-prefetch effect shifted in the previous step S410 (the effect random number update process), and the main in the non-prefetch effect effect preliminarily defined in the ROM 128. By referring to the notice effect category selection table, the main notice effect category at the time of non-prefetch effect is selectively determined.

  Here, a plurality of non-prefetch effect main notice effect category selection tables are prepared corresponding to the stay stage, and the non-prefetch effect main notice effect category selection table corresponding to the stay stage confirmed in the previous step S703. Will be referred to. In the non-prefetching main notice effect category selection table, a plurality of non-prefetch effect main notice effect categories are preliminarily defined, and the comparison value associated with the category and the non-prefetch effect main notice effect category are used for lottery. By comparing with the random number, the main notice effect category at the time of non-prefetch effect is determined. A specific pre-reading effect main notice effect category selection table will be described as a main notice effect effect lottery category using a specific example. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S720.

  Step S720: The effect control CPU 126 stores a pre-determination effect scenario in which a prefetch effect scenario and a main notice effect category are set. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the contents determined in the previous steps S704 and S716 as a set and stores them in the destination determination effect scenario in the buffer area of the RAM 130. That is, the combination of the stop display effect by the effect design, the contents of the reach effect and the special reach effect, and the set of the main notice effect category are stored as the first determination effect scenario. Here, the recorded first determination effect scenario corresponds to the operation memory of one normal symbol, and represents that another first determination effect scenario is stored for the operation memory of another normal symbol. . Also, when the normal symbol working memory is consumed, the corresponding destination determination effect scenario is also erased from the buffer area of the RAM 130. That is, when execution of the content stored in the destination determination effect scenario is set at the time of the change, the destination determination effect scenario is deleted. In addition to the combination of the stop display effect by the effect design, the contents of the reach effect and the special reach effect, the main notice effect category, a set including information such as the change pattern number, change pattern content, change time, etc. You may memorize | store as a prior determination production | presentation scenario.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal symbol operation memory effect management process (FIG. 74).

[Prefetching scenario selection process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of prefetch effect scenario selection processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S730: The effect control CPU 126 executes a combination lottery during the stop display effect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 uses a stop-out lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (production random number update process) to store a stop-out lottery table (not shown) defined in advance in the ROM 128. By referring, the combination at the time of the stop display effect of the effect symbol is selectively determined. In the stop-out lottery table to be referred to, a plurality of types of combination contents at the time of the stop display effect of the effect design are defined in advance, and by comparing the comparison value associated with the content with the random number for stop-out lottery The combination at the time of the stop display effect of the effect symbol is determined.

  Note that the stop-out lottery table to be referenced differs based on the look-ahead information command (result of the operation lottery). When doing so, the off-time stop-out lottery table is referred. It should be noted that the stop-out lottery table that is referred to based on whether the information developed in the previous step S700 is a fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting or a fluctuation pattern at the time of losing rather than the pre-reading information command (result of operation lottery) May be selected.

  For example, in this process, if it is a hit, a combination of effect symbols such as “seven”-“7”-“seven” is selectively determined, and if it falls out, “six”-“3”- A combination of effects such as “four” is selectively determined. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732.

  Step S732: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to the reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the information developed in the previous step S700 corresponds to the fluctuation for executing the reach effect. As a result of the confirmation, if the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to the reach effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S734. On the other hand, when the prefetch variation pattern number does not correspond to the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal symbol prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 75).

  Step S734: The effect control CPU 126 executes a reach effect lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a reach effect lottery table (not shown) defined in advance in the ROM 128 using the reach effect lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process). Thus, the contents of reach production are selectively determined. Multiple types of detailed contents of reach effects are defined in advance in the reach effect lottery table to be referenced, and the contents of reach effect are determined by comparing the comparison value associated with the contents with the random numbers for reach effect lottery. The Rukoto.

  Note that the reach effect lottery table to be referred to is different based on the pre-read information command (result of the operation lottery). Are referred to the out-of-range reach effect lottery tables with different selection probabilities for selecting a plurality of types of reach effects defined in the hit reach effect lottery table. Further, the reach production lottery table to be referred to is different based on the fluctuation time. For example, when the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, the reach production lottery table for 60 seconds is referred to, and when the fluctuation production time is 90 seconds, it is for 90 seconds. The reach production lottery table is referred to. Also, the reach effect lottery table that is similarly referred to may vary depending on whether or not the special reach effect is executed. It should be noted that a reach effect lottery table to be referred based on whether the information developed in the previous step S700 is a fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting or a fluctuation pattern at the time of losing rather than the prefetch information command (result of operation lottery). You may choose.

  The reach production lottery table defines the contents of a plurality of types of reach production. Specifically, reach effects such as a normal reach effect, a super reach effect (FIG. 40), and a battle reach effect (FIGS. 48 to 50 and FIGS. 56 to 64) are defined. In addition, since what is determined here is the content of the reach production, a plurality of “characters” of the opponent are also defined in the battle reach production. Here, in order to determine the detailed contents of the reach production, the combination of the production symbols determined in the previous step S732 may be referred to. Specifically, the “character” of the battle reach production is indicated by the number of the production symbols. In other cases, the “character” of the opponent is selectively determined from a plurality of other types.

  As described above, one of the plurality of types of reach effects is determined using a random number for reach effect lottery, expanded information, a combination of effect symbols at the time of stop display, and the like. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S736.

  Step S736: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to the special reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the information developed in the previous step S700 corresponds to the fluctuation for executing the special reach effect. As a result of this confirmation, when the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to the special reach effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S738. On the other hand, when the prefetch variation pattern number does not correspond to the special reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal symbol prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 75).

  Step S738: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special reach effect lottery. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 uses a special reach production lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (production random number update process) to create a special reach production lottery table (not shown) pre-defined in the ROM 128. By referencing, the contents of the special reach production are selectively determined. In the special reach production lottery table to be referenced, a plurality of detailed contents of the special reach production are specified in advance, and the special reach production lottery is compared by comparing the comparison value associated with the content with the random number for the special reach production lottery. The contents will be determined.

  Note that the special reach production lottery table to be referenced differs based on the look-ahead information command (result of the operation lottery). In this case, reference is made to the extraordinary special reach production lottery table for different times, each of which has different selection probabilities for selecting a plurality of types of reach production defined in the special hour special reach production lottery table. Further, the reach production lottery table to be referred to is different based on the fluctuation time. For example, when the fluctuation time is 90 seconds, the special reach production lottery table for 90 seconds is referred to, and when it is 180 seconds, 180 seconds. The special reach production lottery table is referenced. A special reach effect lottery table that is referred to based on whether the information developed in the previous step S700 is a fluctuation pattern at the time of hitting or a fluctuation pattern at the time of losing rather than the prefetching information command (result of operation lottery). May be selected.

  The special reach production lottery table defines a plurality of types of reach production. Specifically, special reach effects such as effects corresponding to the latter half of the battle reach effects (FIGS. 58 to 64) and accessory reach effects using movable bodies are defined. Note that the content of the special reach effect determined here may have only options that refer to the content of the reach effect determined in the previous step S734 and that is a form in which the reach effect is developed.

  As described above, any of these multiple types of special reach effects can be selected using the random numbers for the special reach effects lottery, the information developed, the combination of the effects at the time of stop display, the contents of the reach effect determined previously, etc. Or one.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the normal symbol prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 75).

[Main notice effect category selection table]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the main notice effect category selection table. The contents of the main notice effect category will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 77, a plurality of main notice effect category selection tables are prepared corresponding to the stay stages, and the effect control CPU 126 generates a main notice effect category selection table corresponding to the stay mode confirmed in the previous step S703. The main notice effect category is determined by reference. In each main notice effect category selection table, a plurality of kinds of main notice effect categories are defined in advance, and a comparison value associated with the category and a random number for main notice effect category lottery for pre-read effects (or a main time for non-pre-read effects) The main notice effect category is determined by comparing the notice effect category lottery random number).

  For example, when the mode (stage) for selecting the main notice effect category is “shore mode”, the main notice effect category selection table (shore mode) is referred to. In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “main notice effect category” are stored as a set in order from the head address. For example, in the “comparison value”, for example, eight different values “31”, “63”, “95”, “127”, “159”, “191”, “223”, “255 (FFH)” ”For each“ comparison value ”,“ unique notice effect category 1 ”,“ proprietary notice effect category 2 ”,“ normal notice effect category 1 ”to“ normal notice ”in the“ main notice effect category ”. An effect category 6 ”is assigned.

  For example, the “unique notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to the notice effect in which a yacht with something written on the mast appears (for example, (A) in FIG. 60). “Category 2” corresponds to a notice effect in which a dolphin carrying a character appears (not shown). Further, the “normal notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to a step-up notice effect that changes in stages (for example, (P) to (S) in FIG. 46). “Normal notice effect category 2” corresponds to a dialogue notice effect in which the character utters a dialogue (for example, (D) in FIG. 52). In addition, for “normal notice effect category 3” to “normal notice effect category 6”, notice effects that do not depend on modes such as pseudo-notice notice effects and cut-in notice effects are supported. As described above, the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode) to be referred to is composed of the specific notice effect category corresponding to the “coast mode” and the normal notice effect category not depending on the mode.

  When this selection table is referred to by the effect control CPU 126, the random number for main notice effect category lottery at the time of pre-reading effect (or the random number for main notice effect category lottery at the time of the non-pre-read effect) is selected as “comparison value” in the selection table. If the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the “main notice effect category” corresponding to the comparison value is selected. For example, if the random value at that time is “77”, the presentation control CPU 126 compares the first comparison value “31” with the next comparison value because the random value exceeds the comparison value. Then, the comparison values are sequentially changed and the comparison value “95” is compared with the random number value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “step-up notice effect” of “normal notice effect 1” as the main notice effect category corresponding thereto.

  For example, when the mode (stage) for selecting the main notice effect category is “indoor mode”, the main notice effect category selection table (indoor mode) is referred to. Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “main notice effect category” are stored as a set in order from the head address. For example, in the “comparison value”, for example, eight different values “31”, “63”, “95”, “127”, “159”, “191”, “223”, “255 (FFH)” ”For each“ comparison value ”,“ unique notice effect category 1 ”,“ proprietary notice effect category 2 ”,“ normal notice effect category 1 ”to“ normal notice ”in the“ main notice effect category ”. An effect category 6 ”is assigned. The main notice effect category selection table (coast mode) and the “comparison value” or the “main notice effect category” may be configured differently.

  For example, the “unique notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to the notice effect in which a character that emits a speech appears when the door is opened (for example, (E) and (F) in FIG. 61). “Inherent notice effect category 2” corresponds to a notice effect that imagines a female character in the room (not shown). Further, the “normal notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to a step-up notice effect that changes in stages (for example, (P) to (S) in FIG. 46). “Normal notice effect category 2” corresponds to a dialogue notice effect in which the character utters a dialogue (for example, (D) in FIG. 52). In addition, for “normal notice effect category 3” to “normal notice effect category 6”, notice effects that do not depend on modes such as pseudo-notice notice effects and cut-in notice effects are supported. As described above, the main notice effect category selection table (indoor mode) to be referred to also includes a specific notice effect category corresponding to the “indoor mode” and a normal notice effect category that does not depend on the mode.

  Here, when this selection table is referred to by the effect control CPU 126, as described in the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode), the random number for the main notice effect category lottery in the prefetch effect (or the non-prefetch effect). Random number for time main notice effect category lottery) is sequentially compared with “comparison value” in the selection table, and if the random value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the “main notice effect category” corresponding to the comparison value is Will be selected.

  For example, when the mode (stage) for selecting the main notice effect category is “Noyama mode”, the main notice effect category selection table (Noyama mode) is referred to. Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “main notice effect category” are stored as a set in order from the head address. For example, in the “comparison value”, for example, eight different values “31”, “63”, “95”, “127”, “159”, “191”, “223”, “255 (FFH)” ”For each“ comparison value ”,“ unique notice effect category 1 ”,“ proprietary notice effect category 2 ”,“ normal notice effect category 1 ”to“ normal notice ”in the“ main notice effect category ”. An effect category 6 ”is assigned. Note that the configuration of the “comparison value” and the “main notice effect category” may be different from the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode) and the like.

  For example, the “unique notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to a notice effect in which a character who speaks a car appears (for example, (J) in FIG. 63). “Category 2” corresponds to a notice effect in which a panda who brought something appears (not shown). Further, the “normal notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to a step-up notice effect that changes in stages (for example, (P) to (S) in FIG. 46). “Normal notice effect category 2” corresponds to a dialogue notice effect in which the character utters a dialogue (for example, (D) in FIG. 52). In addition, for “normal notice effect category 3” to “normal notice effect category 6”, notice effects that do not depend on modes such as pseudo-notice notice effects and cut-in notice effects are supported. Thus, the main notice effect category selection table (Noyama mode) to be referred to is composed of a specific notice effect category corresponding to the “Noyama mode” and a normal notice effect category that does not depend on the mode.

  Here, when this selection table is referred to by the effect control CPU 126, as described in the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode), the random number for the main notice effect category lottery in the prefetch effect (or the non-prefetch effect). Random number for time main notice effect category lottery) is sequentially compared with “comparison value” in the selection table, and if the random value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the “main notice effect category” corresponding to the comparison value is Will be selected.

  For example, when the mode (stage) for selecting the main notice effect category is “park mode”, the main notice effect category selection table (park mode) is referred to. In addition, this selection table also has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “main notice effect category” are stored as a set in order from the start address. “Inherent notice effect category 1”, “Inherent notice effect category 2”, “Normal notice effect category 1” to “Normal notice effect category 6” of the effect category are assigned. Note that the configuration of the “comparison value” and the “main notice effect category” may be different from the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode) and the like.

  For example, the “unique notice effect category 1” of the main notice effect category corresponds to a notice effect in which a dog character with something appears (not shown), and “unique notice effect category 2” is It corresponds to the notice effect that the cat character with 登場 appears (not shown). Also, for the main notice effect categories “normal notice effect category 1” to “normal notice effect category 6”, notices that do not depend on modes such as step-up notice effect, dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous notice effect, cut-in notice effect, etc. The production corresponds. As described above, the main notice effect category selection table (park mode) to be referred to is composed of the specific notice effect category corresponding to the “park mode” and the normal notice effect category not depending on the mode.

  Here, when this selection table is referred to by the effect control CPU 126, as described in the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode), the random number for the main notice effect category lottery in the prefetch effect (or the non-prefetch effect). Random number for time main notice effect category lottery) is sequentially compared with “comparison value” in the selection table, and if the random value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the “main notice effect category” corresponding to the comparison value is Will be selected.

  It should be noted that the main mode information category selection table of other “modes” belonging to “normal mode” (for example, “submarine mode”, “evening mode”, “night view mode”, “overseas mode”, etc.) ”And a normal notice effect category that does not depend on the mode. In addition, the number of unique notice effect categories and normal notice effect categories that constitute each main notice effect category selection table may be different for each selection table, and comparison values corresponding to each category are also different for each selection table. May be different.

  In addition, the main notice effect category table related to the “normal mode” may be set differently based on the prefetch information command and the prefetch variation pattern command. In other words, based on whether the winning or non-winning, the change in reach when the winning expectation is high (change with a long change time) or the change with a low expectation expectation (change with a short change time), etc. The number of unique notice effect categories and normal notice effect categories in the selection table and the comparison values corresponding to the categories may be set differently.

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes a subroutine group of an execution selection process (step S450), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S452), an effect symbol change process (step S454), and an effect symbol stop display process (step S456). It is the composition which includes. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S450: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S452 to S456). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the change display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-process (step S452) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S454) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S456) is selected. When the variable start winning device is operating (opening / closing operation, end process, etc.), the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S452 to S456). First, the effect symbol management process is terminated.

  Step S452: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (the lottery result, the variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the advance notice pattern before reach occurrence other than the pre-read notice effect pattern) , A notice pattern etc. after reach occurrence). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S454: In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S456: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the normal symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means).

  Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the stage change effect, and when executing the stage change effect, determines which stage (mode) to change to, and responds to the determination. Set up. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S405 in FIG. 73) and the lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 73). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a win, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Note that whether or not the current variation is off (winning) can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a hit variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the contents (schedule, performance execution timing) such as effects, reach effects, pre-read effects, etc. related to effect symbols performed during normal symbol variation display, and setting the determined contents Execute. Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selectively determines the contents (schedule, performance execution timing) such as effects, reach effects, pre-read effects, etc. related to effect symbols performed during normal symbol variation display, and setting the determined contents Execute. Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When one of the processes in step S610 or step S612 above is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, an internal lottery result (winning or non-winning) and a current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that the player will eventually win. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning. Specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 78).

  Next, the contents of the after-hit effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Hit fluctuation effect pattern selection processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the hit variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S750: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the destination determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and reads the contents of the recorded destination determination effect scenario. Note that the destination determination effect scenario to be read corresponds to the change, and is not a destination determination effect scenario corresponding to another change. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S752.

  Step S752: The effect control CPU 126 sets a combination for the effect symbol stop display effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 acquires information about the combination of the effect symbols included in the destination determination effect scenario read out in the previous step S750, and the effect symbol stop display effect based on the information. Set the combination of performance symbols to be displayed at times. Therefore, the combination of effect symbols displayed at the end of the effect symbol variation display is set in the same manner.

  For example, each effect symbol is displayed in a combination of “seven”-“7”-“seven” at the end of the effect symbol variation display effect, and in a combination of “seven”-“7”-“seven” in the stop display effect. Settings such as displaying each effect symbol are performed.

  As described above, when the setting of the combination at the stop display effect of the effect symbol is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S754.

  Step S754: The effect control CPU 126 sets a reach effect or a special reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 acquires information about the contents of the reach effect included in the destination determination effect scenario read out in the previous step S750, and performs settings for executing the reach effect based on the information. In addition, when the information on the content of the special effect is included in the destination determination effect scenario read out in the previous step S750, the setting for executing the special reach effect is similarly performed based on the information. In addition, about the setting which performs reach production and special reach production, refer to the production table (not shown), and the schedule (occurrence of the reach production and special reach production to be performed based on the content of the reach production and the content of the special production Timing, end timing, execution timing of cut-in notice effect, effect switch button effective time setting, etc.). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S756.

  Step S756: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process), and the effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery pre-defined in the ROM 128. By referring to a table (not shown), the pattern of the effect display variation display effect is selectively determined. There are multiple types of effect display variation display effect patterns in the effect design variation display effect detail lottery table to be referenced, and the comparison value associated with that pattern is compared with the random number for effect design variation display effect detail lottery. As a result, the variation display effect pattern of the effect symbol is determined.

  For example, in the effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery table, a plurality of types of behavior patterns of each effect symbol at the time of effect symbol variation display are defined. Specifically, with regard to the pattern at the start of the variable display effect, a pattern in which the scroll change is started in the order of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol, or all effect symbols simultaneously start the scroll change. Patterns are specified. In addition, for the pattern when each effect symbol is stopped, a pattern in which the speed of scroll fluctuation is slowed down and stops naturally, a sliding pattern, a returning pattern, a bitterness pattern, and the like are defined.

  Accordingly, the effect control CPU 126 uses the effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery random number to select one of these multiple types of effect display variation pattern effect patterns as the effect symbol variation display effect pattern. decide. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S758.

  Step S758: The effect control CPU 126 sets the effect symbol variation display effect in detail. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays the variation display effect pattern of the effect symbol determined in the previous step S756 and information on the change time included in the destination determination effect scenario read in the previous step S750 (note that the change time If the information is not stored, based on the information obtained by developing the received variation pattern command), a setting for executing the variation display effect of the normal symbol is performed.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 79).

  As described above, when the result of the operation lottery of the normal symbol is a win at the time of the change, only the detailed content lottery of the change display effect of the effect symbol is executed in the hit fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In addition, lottery is not executed for the combination of other effect symbols at the time of stop display, the contents of reach effects, and the contents of special effects. This is because the determination is made in advance when the operation memory of the normal symbol is acquired, the contents are stored as the first determination effect scenario, and the storage is read out. Therefore, by not executing those lottery processes at the time of the change, it is possible to reduce the processing performed by the gaming machine and reduce the risk of malfunction due to overflow or the like.

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the off-time variation effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S770: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the first determination production scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether or not a destination determination effect scenario corresponding to the change is stored.

  For example, in the normal symbol prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 75), when the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value (step S702: Yes), the predetermination effect scenario is stored, whereas the prefetch variation If the pattern number corresponds to an indefinite value (step S702: No), the previous determination effect scenario is not stored. Specifically, as shown in the indeterminate value fixed value correspondence table for each pre-reading variation pattern command (FIG. 23), when the result of the normal symbol operation lottery is a win, all of them are fixed values but out of place. In some cases, the value may correspond to a fixed value or may correspond to an indefinite value based on the result of prior determination of the variation pattern. Therefore, if the result of the normal symbol operation lottery is out of order, the variation pattern may change at the time of the variation corresponding to the indefinite value, so that the first determination effect scenario may not be stored.

  If the result of this confirmation is that there is a memory of the destination determination effect scenario (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S772. On the other hand, when there is no memory of the first determination effect scenario (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S774.

  Step S772: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the destination determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and reads the contents of the recorded destination determination effect scenario. Note that the destination determination effect scenario to be read corresponds to the change, and is not a destination determination effect scenario corresponding to another change. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S778.

  Step S774: The effect control CPU 126 develops a normal symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, refers to the newly recorded normal symbol variation pattern command, and confirms the variation pattern number corresponding to the referenced value and the content of the variation pattern. Further, based on the confirmed contents, information corresponding to the number of seconds of change, whether or not the reach effect is executed, and whether or not the special reach effect is executed is developed.

  For example, when the variation pattern command is “B6H03H”, the variation pattern number is “4”, and the variation pattern content represents “non-reach variation pattern 4”. Therefore, the information to be developed represents that the variation time is “20 seconds”, the reach production is “corresponding to a variation that is not executed (no)”, and the special reach production is “corresponding to a variation that is not executed (no)”. Yes.

  As described above, when the normal symbol variation pattern command is developed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S776.

  Step S776: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect scenario selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the combination of the stop display effect by the effect symbol, and sets the contents of the reach effect and the special reach effect. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S778.

  Step S778: The effect control CPU 126 sets a combination for the effect symbol stop display effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays information about the combination of the effect symbols included in the destination determination effect scenario read out in the previous step S772 or the stop display of the effect symbols set in the previous step S776. Based on the information about the combination at the time of production, a combination of production symbols to be displayed at the time of production of stop display of the production symbol is set. Therefore, the combination of effect symbols displayed at the end of the effect symbol variation display is set in the same manner.

  For example, each effect symbol is displayed in a combination of “6”-“3”-“four” at the end of the effect symbol variation display effect, and in a combination of “six”-“3”-“four” at the stop display effect. Settings such as displaying each effect symbol are performed.

  As described above, when the combination setting at the stop display effect of the effect symbol is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S780.

  Step S780: The effect control CPU 126 sets a reach effect or a special reach effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 has information about the contents of the reach production and the special reach production included in the destination determination production scenario read out in the previous step S750, or the reach production and the special reach production set in the previous step S776. Based on the information about the contents, the setting for executing the reach effect and the special reach effect is performed. In addition, about the setting which performs reach production and special reach production, refer to the production table (not shown), and the schedule (occurrence of the reach production and special reach production to be performed based on the content of the reach production and the content of the special production Timing, end timing, execution timing of cut-in notice effect, effect switch button effective time setting, etc.).

  As described above, when the setting for executing the reach effect or the special reach effect is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S782. When there is no information about the contents of the reach effect or the contents of the special reach effect, that is, when the variation pattern does not execute the reach effect, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S782 without executing this process. To do.

  Step S782: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process), and the effect symbol variation display effect detail lottery pre-defined in the ROM 128. By referring to a table (not shown), the pattern of the effect display variation display effect is selectively determined. Since this process is the same as the process executed at the time of hitting (step S758), description thereof is omitted. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S784.

  Step S784: The effect control CPU 126 sets the effect symbol variation display effect in detail. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays the variation display effect pattern of the effect symbol determined in the previous step S782, and information on the change time included in the destination determination effect scenario read in the previous step S750 (note that the change time If the information is not stored, the information obtained by developing the received fluctuation pattern command) or the normal time based on the fluctuation time information obtained by developing the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command in the previous step S774. Performs settings to execute the symbol variation display effect.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 79).

  As described above, even when the result of the operation lottery of the normal symbol is out of time at the time of the change, and the change pattern corresponds to a fixed value, the change effect at the time of the outage is the same as in the hit. In the pattern selection process, only the lottery of the detailed contents of the effect display variation display effect is executed, and the lottery is executed for the combination of the other effect symbols when stopped display, the content of the reach effect, the content of the special effect Not done. If the fluctuation pattern corresponds to a fixed value when the working memory of a normal symbol is acquired (the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of working memories), it is determined in advance and the content is first This is because the determination effect scenario is stored and the stored memory is read out. Therefore, by not executing those lottery processes at the time of the change, it is possible to reduce the processing performed by the gaming machine and reduce the risk of malfunction due to overflow or the like.

[Direction scenario selection process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect scenario selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the content of the process similar to a previous prefetch effect scenario selection process (FIG. 76).

  Step S790: The effect control CPU 126 executes a combination lottery at the time of effect stop display effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 uses a stop-out lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (production random number update process) to store a stop-out lottery table (not shown) defined in advance in the ROM 128. By referring, the combination at the time of the stop display effect of the effect symbol is selectively determined. In the stop-out lottery table to be referred to, a plurality of types of combinations at the time of the stop-display effect of the effect symbol are defined in advance, and the effect symbol is compared with the comparison value associated with the content and the random number for stop-out lottery The combination at the time of stop display effect is determined.

  For example, in this process, a combination of effect symbols such as “six”-“3”-“four” is selectively determined. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S732.

  Step S792: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the variation pattern number corresponds to the reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the information developed in the previous step S774 corresponds to the fluctuation for executing the reach effect. As a result of the confirmation, if the variation pattern number corresponds to the reach effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S794. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number does not correspond to the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the deviation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 81).

  Step S794: The effect control CPU 126 executes a reach effect lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a reach effect lottery table (not shown) defined in advance in the ROM 128 using the reach effect lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process). Thus, the contents of reach production are selectively determined. Multiple types of detailed contents of reach effects are defined in advance in the reach effect lottery table to be referenced, and the contents of reach effect are determined by comparing the comparison value associated with the contents with the random numbers for reach effect lottery. The Rukoto.

  The reach effect lottery table to be referred to differs based on the variation time. For example, when the variation time is 60 seconds, the reach effect lottery table for 60 seconds is referred to, and when it is 90 seconds, the reach effect lottery table is for 90 seconds. The reach production lottery table is referred to. Also, the reach effect lottery table that is similarly referred to may vary depending on whether or not the special reach effect is executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S796.

  Step S796: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the variation pattern number corresponds to the special reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the information developed in the previous step S774 corresponds to the fluctuation for executing the special reach effect. As a result of the confirmation, if the variation pattern number corresponds to the special reach effect (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S798. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number does not correspond to the special reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the off-time change effect pattern selection process (FIG. 81).

  Step S798: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special reach effect lottery. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 uses a special reach production lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (production random number update process) to create a special reach production lottery table (not shown) pre-defined in the ROM 128. By referencing, the contents of the special reach production are selectively determined. In the special reach production lottery table to be referenced, a plurality of detailed contents of the special reach production are defined in advance, and the special reach production lottery random number is compared with the comparison value associated with the content. The contents of the production will be determined.

  The special reach production lottery table defines a plurality of types of reach production. Specifically, special reach effects such as effects corresponding to the latter half of the battle reach effects (FIGS. 58 to 64) and accessory reach effects (not shown) using a movable body are defined. It should be noted that the contents of the special reach effect determined here may have only options that refer to the content of the reach effect determined in the previous step S794 and that form the reach effect.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the deviation variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 81).

[Preliminary selection process]
Next, the content of the notice selection process executed in the effect symbol variation pre-process will be described.
FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the notice selection process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the execution of the pre-reading effect is set in the previous step S714 (during the normal symbol pre-reading effect selection process), and the variation corresponding to the pre-reading effect is completed. As a result of this confirmation, when the pre-reading effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect is not being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S810.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 sets the main notice effect category to the same category as the main notice effect category of the target change of the prefetch effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130, and refers to the pre-determination effect scenario regarding the variation that is the target of the prefetch effect. Then, information on the main notice effect category in the referenced destination determination effect scenario is read out, and the main notice effect category in the change is set as the main notice effect category in the read information. Therefore, it represents that the main notice effect in the same category as the variation that is the target of the prefetch effect is executed. It should be noted that only the categories are the same, and the content of the main notice effect to be executed is different from the variation targeted for the prefetch effect. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 sets the main notice effect content level higher than the previous setting. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 sets the main notice effect content level that can be selected when determining the content of the main notice effect in the subsequent step S814 higher than the previously set level. Here, the main announcement effect content level indicates the degree of high expectation level of the jackpot, the lowest level indicates that the expected level of jackpot is low, and the highest level indicates that the expected level of jackpot is very high. Represents high. Specifically, when Level 1 to Level 5 exist, the jackpot expectation is 2% (Level 1), 5% (Level 2), 10% (Level 3), 20% (Level 4), 50% in order. (Level 5). If there is no previous setting history and this time is the first setting, the main notice effect content level is set to the lowest level 1. On the other hand, if the previous main notice effect content level is level 1, it is set to level 2 this time.

  As described above, when the setting of the main notice effect content level is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S806.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 sets the notice effect content category corresponding to the target variation of the prefetch effect. Specifically, a category related to the content of the notice effect that can be selected when determining the content of the notice effect in the subsequent step S814 or step S816 is set in correspondence with the target variation of the prefetch effect. Here, the category related to the content of the notice effect represents a “character” corresponding to the number of the effect design, for example, the category corresponding to the number “1” represents the “cat character”, and the number “ The category corresponding to “7” represents “female character”. The category related to the notice effect is not limited to one of the “characters” corresponding to the numbers of the effect symbols, and may represent the contents of the reach effect. For example, if the content of the reach effect in the variation corresponding to the pre-reading effect is “battle reach effect”, “battle reach effect” is set as the category related to the notice effect, and the content of the reach effect is set to “normal reach effect” .

    As described above, when the setting of the notice effect content category is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S814.

  Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a main notice effect category setting process at the time of non-prefetch effect execution. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not information related to the main notice effect category is recorded in the first determination effect scenario, and if it is recorded, sets the main notice effect category based on the information. If not recorded, the main notice effect category based on the stay stage is selectively determined. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S814.

  Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a main notice effect detailed lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the main notice effect detailed lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process) to preliminarily define the main notice effect detailed lottery table (not shown) in the ROM 128. ) To selectively determine the content of the main notice effect. In the main lottery effect detailed lottery table to be referred to, multiple types of detailed contents of the main trailer effect are specified in advance, and the main notice is compared by comparing the comparison value associated with the content with the random number for the main notice effect detailed lottery. The detailed contents of the production will be determined.

  Note that the main notice effect detailed lottery table to be referred to differs based on the main notice effect category, for example, when the main notice effect category is a notice effect (step-up notice effect) in which the image changes step by step. The main notice effect detailed lottery table for step-up notice effect is referred to, and when the character is a line notice effect that the line utters, the main notice effect detail lottery table for the line notice effect is referred.

  Further, the main notice effect detailed lottery table to be referred to may be changed based on the lottery result command for normal symbols (result of the operation lottery). For example, if the result of the normal symbol operation lottery corresponds to a win, refer to the main lottery effect detailed lottery table for big hits when it is easy to select the content with high expectation level of the big hit. You may refer to the main notice effect detailed lottery table for the off-time when the low content is easily selected. It should be noted that the main notice effect detailed lottery table to be referred to is selected based on whether the variation pattern at the time of hitting or the variation pattern at the time of losing based on the variation pattern command, not the lottery result command (result of operation lottery) May be.

  In addition, the content of the main notice effect provided in the main notice effect details lottery table is associated with the main notice effect content level and the notice effect content category, and if they are set in advance, The content of the main notice effect that can be selected based on the content is limited. For example, when the main notice effect content level is set to level 1 and the notice effect content category is set to “female character”, the content of the main notice effect specified in the referred main notice effect details lottery table Of these, the content of the main notice effect other than the main notice effect content level 1 and the content of the main notice effect other than the “female character” in the notice effect content category indicate that it cannot be selected. On the other hand, when the main notice effect content level and the notice effect content category are not set, it indicates that the contents of all seed notice effects specified in the referenced main notice effect details lottery table can be selected.

  As described above, when the detailed content of the main notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S816.

  Step S816: The effect control CPU 126 executes other notice effect lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the notice effect lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process) to store another notice effect lottery table (not shown) preliminarily defined in the ROM 128. By referencing, the content of the notice effect different from the main notice effect is selectively determined. In the other notice effect lottery tables to be referenced, a plurality of types of notice effect contents different from the main notice effect are prescribed in advance, and the comparison value associated with the contents is compared with the random number for the notice effect lottery. The content of the notice effect different from the main notice effect is determined.

  For example, in the other notice effect lottery tables, notice effects such as a cut-in notice effect in which a character suddenly appears, a group notice effect in which multiple characters cross the screen, and an accessory notice effect by operating a movable body are specified. Has been. As for the contents of these notice effects, the contents of the main notice effect selected in the previous step S814, the lottery result command (result of the operation lottery) of the normal symbol of the change, or the prefetch effect is being executed. The content of the notice effect may be determined based on the content related to the change to be prefetched. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S818.

  Step S818: The effect control CPU 126 sets execution of the notice effect. Specifically, a setting for executing the notice effect (the main notice effect and other notice effects) determined in the previous step S814 or step S816 is performed. In addition, about the setting which performs a notice effect, an effect table (not shown) is referred and the schedule (generation timing, end timing, etc.) of the notice effect to perform is set based on the content of the notice effect.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 79).

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the main notice effect category setting process during execution of the non-prefetch effect. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the first determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether or not a destination determination effect scenario corresponding to the change is stored.

  For example, in the normal symbol prefetch effect selection process (FIG. 75), when the prefetch variation pattern number corresponds to a fixed value (step S702: Yes), the predetermination effect scenario is stored, whereas the prefetch variation If the pattern number corresponds to an indefinite value (step S702: No), the previous determination effect scenario is not stored. Specifically, as shown in the indeterminate value fixed value correspondence table for each pre-reading variation pattern command (FIG. 23), when the result of the normal symbol operation lottery is a win, all of them are fixed values but out of place. In some cases, the value may correspond to a fixed value or may correspond to an indefinite value based on the result of prior determination of the variation pattern. Therefore, if the result of the normal symbol operation lottery is out of order, the variation pattern may change at the time of the variation corresponding to the indefinite value, so that the first determination effect scenario may not be stored.

  As a result of the confirmation, if there is a memory of the first determination effect scenario (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S822. On the other hand, when there is no memory of the first determination effect scenario (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S826.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the destination determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the destination determination effect scenario regarding the change. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S824.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not information on the main notice effect category exists. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the main notice effect category is associated with the prefetch effect scenario referred to in the previous step S822. For example, as described above, when the stage change effect is executed, the player may feel uncomfortable when the mode-specific notice effect determined in the previous determination is executed in the next change. The notice effect determined by the determination is not executed. Therefore, even if the pre-determination effect scenario is stored, when the stage change effect is executed, the information about the main notice effect category related to the notice effect may be erased and may not exist.

  If the result of this confirmation is that there is information on the main notice effect category (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S830. On the other hand, when there is no information on the main notice effect category (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S826.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the stay stage during the effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 confirms what stage (mode) is currently being produced. For example, whether it is “coast mode” ((A), (B) in FIG. 60) or “indoor mode” ((C) in FIG. 60 to (G) in FIG. 60), “Noyama mode” ( 62 (H) to 63 (K)) are checked. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S828.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes a main notice effect category lottery during the non-prefetch effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the random number for the main notice effect category notice lottery in the non-prefetch effect shifted in the previous step S410 (the effect random number update process), and the main in the non-prefetch effect effect preliminarily defined in the ROM 128. By referring to the notice effect category selection table (for example, FIG. 76), the main notice effect category at the time of the non-prefetch effect based on the stay stage is selectively determined. For example, when the stay stage is “coast mode”, the main notice effect category at the time of non-prefetch effect is selectively determined with reference to the main notice effect category selection table (coast mode). Note that the details of the specific process are the same as in step S718 (ordinary symbol pre-reading effect selection process: FIG. 75), and will not be described. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S830.

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 sets a main notice effect category. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 reads information on the main notice effect category in the destination determination effect scenario referred to in the previous step S809, and sets the main notice effect category in the fluctuation.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the notice selection process (FIG. 83).

  Next, the specific contents of the stage change effect setting process performed during the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78) will be described.

[Stage change effect setting processing]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of stage change effect setting processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not the time reduction function is inactive in the current game state and the probability variation function is inactive, that is, [F1] normal game described above. Check if it is in the middle. As a result of the confirmation, if the current game mode is the normal mode (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S851. On the other hand, when the current game mode is not the normal mode (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S870.

  Step S851: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the execution of the pre-reading effect is set in the previous step S714 (during the normal symbol pre-reading effect selection process), and the variation corresponding to the pre-reading effect is completed. As a result of this confirmation, when the pre-reading effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78). On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect is not being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S852. When the pre-reading effect ends in the change, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the pre-reading effect is not being executed, and then executes step S852.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes a stage change effect execution lottery. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 uses the stage change effect execution lottery random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process) to preliminarily define the stage change effect execution lottery table (not shown) in the ROM 128. ) To determine whether or not to execute the stage change effect by lottery.

  For example, in the stage change effect execution lottery table, it is defined that the stage change effect is not executed for the comparison value 0 to 200, and the stage change effect is specified for the comparison value 201 to 255, A stage change effect execution lottery may be executed in which a random number for stage change effect execution lottery and a comparison value thereof are compared to determine whether the winning or not winning.

  As described above, when it is determined whether or not to execute the stage change effect, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S854.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not to execute the stage change effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the decision to execute the stage change effect has been obtained in the previous step S852. As a result of the confirmation, when the stage change effect is executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S856. On the other hand, when the stage change effect is not executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78).

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 selects a stage change effect, and sets execution of the stage change effect based on the selection. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 first uses the stage change effect selection random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process) to select the stage change effect selection preliminarily defined in the ROM 128. By referring to the table, the content of the stage change effect is determined by lottery. A specific stage change effect selection table will be described using a specific example. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S858.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the first determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether at least one destination determination effect scenario is stored. As a result of the confirmation, if there is a memory of the first determination effect scenario (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S860. On the other hand, when there is no memory of the first determination effect scenario (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78).

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 deletes the information about the main performance effect category in the first determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and deletes only the information on the main notice effect category stored in all the previously determined effect scenarios. That is, only the information of the main notice effect category is deleted from the information included in the pre-decision effect scenario (combination at the time of stop display effect by effect design, contents of reach effect and special reach effect, main notice effect category), etc. This information represents a process for maintaining the information as it is, and represents that the process for erasing and maintaining is performed for all stored pre-determination effect scenarios.

  Therefore, when the effect control CPU 126 executes this process, it is confirmed that the main notice effect category information does not exist in the previous step S824 (process during the main notice effect category setting process at the time of executing the non-prefetch effect: FIG. 85). The Rukoto. As described above, when the information about the main performance effect category is deleted, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78).

  Step S870: The effect control CPU 126 executes stage change effect installation processing in the non-normal mode. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a stage change effect that changes the background image that changes with the progress of the game flow when [F1] is not in a normal game and [F19] is in a probable change. Execute the setting process. For example, as described with reference to FIG. 71, a process of changing the background image based on the number of limiters is executed.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78). This stage change effect setting process is not executed during the effect symbol stop display process, but in the effect symbol change pre-process (step S452 in FIG. 78) or the effect symbol change process (step S454 in FIG. 78). It may be executed with. That is, the stage change effect for changing the background image may be executed not at the time of normal symbol stop display but at the time of starting the normal symbol variation display or during the normal symbol variation display.

[Stage change production selection table]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a stage change effect selection table.
This selection table has, for example, a structure in which “comparison value” and “mode (stage)” are stored as a set in order from the head address.

  For example, in the “comparison value”, for example, eight different values “31”, “63”, “95”, “127”, “159”, “191”, “223”, “255 (FFH)” ”For each“ comparison value ”,“ coast mode ”,“ indoor mode ”,“ noyama mode ”,“ park mode ”,“ seabed mode ”,“ evening mode ”,“ night view mode ” , “Overseas mode” is assigned. Note that these are not limited to these “comparison values” and “mode (stage)”, and can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, for “coast mode”, a stage effect (for example, (A), (B), etc. in FIG. 60) in which a background image with an image such as “sand beach”, “sea”, “island” as a motif is displayed. Is executed.

  For example, in the “indoor mode”, a stage effect (for example, (C) in FIG. 60 to (G) in FIG. 62) is displayed in which a background image of a landscape where a female character is relaxing indoors is displayed.

  For example, in the “Noyama mode”, a stage effect (for example, (H) in FIG. 62 to (J) in FIG. 63) in which a background image of a landscape representing Noyama is displayed is executed.

  In addition, for “park mode”, “submarine mode”, “evening mode”, “night view mode”, and “overseas mode”, stage effects (in the figure) where background images are displayed with characteristic landscapes and characters, respectively. Not) is executed.

  The effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares with the “comparison value” in the stage change effect selection table using the stage change effect selection random number shifted in the previous step S410 (effect random number update process). If the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the “mode (stage)” corresponding to the comparison value is selected. For example, if the random value at that time is “77”, the presentation control CPU 126 compares the first comparison value “31” with the next comparison value because the random value exceeds the comparison value. Then, the comparison values are sequentially changed and the comparison value “95” is compared with the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “Noyama mode” as the mode (stage) corresponding thereto.

[Normal presentation management processing per symbol]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the after-effects management process for normal symbols. For example, the after-hit effect management process for the normal symbol is, for example, an execution selection process (step S500), an initial variable start winning device operation process (step S502), a special symbol change-time effect process (step S504), and a major role start effect process (step S506). ), A group of subroutines for the end effect process (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the post effect management process per normal symbol in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, the effect control CPU 126 selects the first variable start winning device operating process (step S502) as the first jump destination. On the other hand, if the first variable start winning apparatus operation process (step S502) has already been completed and a special symbol variation pattern command (or a start opening winning sound control command) has been received, the effect control CPU 126 can As a jump destination, the special symbol variation effect process (step S504) is selected. If the special symbol variation effect processing (step S504) is completed and the winning command for the special symbol (internal lottery) has been received, the effect control CPU 126 will perform the effect processing after starting the big role as the next jump destination (step S506). ) Is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 126 selects the end process (step S508) as the next jump destination when the end flag is set in the effect process after the start of the big role. Note that the first variable start winning device activation process (step S502) and the special symbol variation effect process (step S504) are not selected as jump destinations when a state designation command representing "time reduction state" is received. This is because, when the game flow is once shifted to the “time reduction state” ([F19] during probability change or [F31] time reduction), the center of the effect content is the above-mentioned effect during change (FIG. 36) or limiter addition effect (FIG. 37), the effect after reaching the limiter (FIG. 38), the background change effect (FIG. 39), etc., during this time the variable start winning device operating effect (FIG. 64) and the special symbol change effect (FIGS. 65-65) This is because it is not necessary to execute 67).

  Step S502: In the first variable start winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect when the variable start winning device 26 is operated after the first hit of the normal symbol (operation lottery). The contents of the effect controlled here are the same as the effects when the variable start winning device is activated (FIG. 64). For example, a message such as “Right-right!” Is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. By displaying, the progress status in the game flow is guided to the player. By executing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from digesting the game indiscriminately and to reconfirm the purpose consciousness to prevent a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Step S504: In the special symbol variation production process, the production control CPU 126 can produce the content corresponding to the special symbol variation display or stop display. The contents of the effect controlled here are the same as the special symbol fluctuation effects (FIGS. 65 to 67) described above. By performing such an effect, the player has a sense of expectation whether or not he / she can enter the chance change (chance zone) due to the special symbol (internal lottery) fluctuation after the first winning of the normal symbol (action lottery), It is possible to provide fun and fun.

  Step S506: In the effect process after the start of the big role, the effect control CPU 126, as described above, the effect during probability change (FIG. 68), the limiter addition effect (FIG. 69), the effect after reaching the limiter (FIGS. 70 and 72), the background change effect ( 71) and the like are controlled. As a result, information on the flow and progress of the game after the game flow has changed to [F19] Probability Change or [F31] Time Shortening is communicated to the player, or the “limiter count” addition is strongly urged. Can be.

  Step S508: In the end effect process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the effect accompanying the end of [F19] probability change. The content of the effect controlled here is the same as the aspect ((A) in FIG. 38) representing “chance zone end” among the effects after reaching the limiter described above. By executing such an effect, once the [F19] probability change is completed, the player is informed in the game flow, and the game motivation is maintained for the next transition to [F19] probability change. Can be made.

[Summary of production techniques]
According to the example of the production method described above, information useful to the player can be provided as production in accordance with the progress of the game flow in the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, (1) the necessity of “right-handed” has occurred per normal symbol, and (2) internal lottery (special figure fluctuation) due to winning at the variable start winning device 28 (start winning port 28a). (3) Winning in the internal lottery (with time reduction at the time of the first hit), (4) The game flow is changing to [F19] probability change or [F31] time reduction (rushing in) (5) [F19] The remaining “limiter count” decreases during certain changes, (6) “Limiter count” increases, (7) After reaching the limiter [F31] [F19] Information that the opportunity to return to the probability change has occurred, and (8) the fact that [F19] the probability change is ended by reaching the limiter and the game flow is returned to [F1] normal game, etc. Provide direct to the player by directing Teaching, it is possible to suggest). Further, regarding (3) above, it can be provided as information that the winning in the probable variation pattern was not obtained by the internal lottery.

  Thereby, the player can fully enjoy the game performance by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment while preventing the game from being performed indiscriminately while the progress of the game flow is not understood by the player. In addition, by clearly realizing from the contents of the production that the “limiter count” has actually increased in the game flow, it is possible to give the player his own game outcome ([F19] 2% normal win during probability change) The player can feel a certain level of satisfaction and achievement. Alternatively, by clearly realizing from the production contents that the revival occurred after reaching the limiter in the game flow, the player's own game result (35% after reaching the limiter was also shortened and the normal win was assigned) ) Realize it, so that the player can have a certain level of satisfaction and achievement.

  In particular, in the internal game flow, the contents of the actual control processing are complicated for the mechanisms (6) and (7) above, but in the present embodiment, this is transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner as performance information. In that respect, not only the game flow but also the production technique is excellent.

[Usefulness in game flow]
In addition, in the present embodiment, the original game flow itself has the following utility.
(1) For example, [F16] The right (possibility) to generate a loop during [F19] probability change continuously 17 times including the first time by winning the [F16] probability change symbol 1 and 2 from the normal game To do. Accordingly, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation for each loop, and the profit can be increased.

(2) Furthermore, if [F19] normal symbol 1 winning is assigned in the middle of [F19] probabilistic change loop, [F38] probable symbol 1 and 2 winning (98% probable change ratio) occurs after [F31] time reduction. It is easy to re-loop into [F19] probability change. In this case, since the “limiter count” is reset (reset) as described above, a new “limiter count” is added to the amount that has been digested in the previous loop. Become. As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation, and the profit can be further increased.

(3) Also, even if [F19] no extra occurrence occurs in the loop under certain probability and the remaining “limiter count” reaches 0, [F43] normal symbol 1 win or [F45] Probability change symbol 1 win → compulsory normal symbol 1 (combination selection ratio 35%), it is possible to restart the loop [F19] in the middle of [F19] time shortening from there. Also in this case, since the “limiter count” is reset (reset), a new “limiter count” is added to the amount that has been digested during the loop before reaching the limiter. . As a result, the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a winning ball through the [F22] variable start winning device operation and the [F18] variable winning device operation, and the profit can be further increased.

(4) In addition, since the profit of (2) or (3) may occur randomly according to the result of the special symbol (internal lottery), the above (2) and (3) occur in a chain. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property that can add a ball to the ball each time.

(5) In addition, in this type of pachinko game, drawing a probabilistic symbol basically generates continuity of profit (so-called continuous chain). The common sense of gaming is that sex ends. However, in this embodiment, [F19] Draws regular symbols during probability change to generate continuity of profits, which is significant in that it achieves game characteristics using the concept of reversal from the conventional one. It is useful.

  The present invention can employ various modifications without being limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the images and operations given as examples of various production methods are merely examples, and these can be modified as appropriate.

  For example, in the stage change effect setting process (FIG. 85) of the above-described embodiment, when the execution of the stage change effect is set, all the information on the main notice effect category included in the first determination effect scenario has been deleted. However, whether or not to delete the information may be determined based on whether or not the main notice effect category is a specific notice effect category corresponding to the stage. In addition, the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the stage change effect may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied even when the prefetch effect is not executed. Hereinafter, specific processing contents will be described.

[Stage Change Effect Setting Processing in Second Embodiment]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of stage change effect setting processing in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process which is the same as the stage change effect setting process in embodiment mentioned above.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is a memory of the first determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and checks whether at least one destination determination effect scenario is stored. If the result of this confirmation is that there is a memory of the destination determination effect scenario (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S859. On the other hand, when there is no memory of the first determination effect scenario (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78).

  Step S859: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the main notice effect category is a specific notice effect category. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 reads out information on the main notice effect category included in all the previously determined effect scenarios confirmed in the previous step S858. Then, it is confirmed whether the read main notice effect category is a unique notice effect category unique to the stage or a normal notice effect category unrelated to the stage.

  If the result of this confirmation is that the main notice effect category is the unique notice effect category (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S860. On the other hand, when the main notice effect category is not the specific notice effect category (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78).

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 deletes the information about the main performance effect category in the first determination effect scenario. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130 and deletes only the information on the main notice effect category stored in all the previously determined effect scenarios. That is, only the information of the main notice effect category is deleted from the information included in the pre-decision effect scenario (combination at the time of stop display effect by effect design, contents of reach effect and special reach effect, main notice effect category), etc. This information represents a process for maintaining the information as it is, and represents that the process for erasing and maintaining is performed for all stored pre-determination effect scenarios. Here, only the information on the specific notice effect category is deleted, indicating that the information on the normal notice effect category is maintained as it is.

  As described above, when the execution of the stage change effect is set, the information on the specific notice effect category is erased, whereas the information on the normal notice effect category is not erased. Therefore, if the main notice effect category stored in the first determination effect scenario corresponds to the normal notice effect category, it is not necessary to draw the main notice effect category again because the information is not erased at the time of the change. The burden on the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Stage Change Effect Setting Processing in the Third Embodiment]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of stage change effect setting processing in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process which is the same as the stage change effect setting process in embodiment mentioned above.

  Step S851: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetch effect is being executed. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the execution of the pre-reading effect is set in the previous step S714 (during the normal symbol pre-reading effect selection process), and the variation corresponding to the pre-reading effect is completed. As a result of this confirmation, when the pre-reading effect is being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78). On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect is not being executed (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S851a. When the pre-reading effect ends in the change, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the pre-reading effect is not being executed, and then executes step S851a.

  Step S851a: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is information on reach production with a high expectation of winning. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the buffer area of the RAM 130, reads all the stored pre-determination effect scenarios, and confirms the contents of the reach effect in them. And it is confirmed whether the content of the confirmed reach production is a reach production with high winning expectation degree. As a result of the confirmation, if there is information on reach production with a high expectation of winning (Yes), the production control CPU 126 returns to the production symbol stop display processing (step S456 in FIG. 78). On the other hand, when there is no information on reach production with high expectation of winning (No), the production control CPU 126 next executes step S851b.

  Step S851b: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the predetermined number of fluctuations has been executed on the same stage. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the normal symbol variation has been executed a predetermined number of times after the execution of the stage change effect is set in step S856. For example, a counter is prepared in the counter buffer area of the RAM 130, the counter value is reset if step S856 is executed, the counter value is incremented (+1) if this stage change effect setting process is executed, and this In the process, it is confirmed whether or not the counter value has reached a predetermined value (is greater than or equal to a predetermined value). As a result of this confirmation, when the predetermined number of fluctuations has been executed on the same stage (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S852. On the other hand, when the predetermined number of fluctuations are not executed on the same stage (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol stop display process (step S456 in FIG. 78).

  As described above, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined by the effect control CPU 126 whether or not to execute the stage change effect in the next step S852. Therefore, when staying on a stage with a high expectation of winning, a stage change effect is executed and changed to another stage, or a stage change effect is frequently executed by winning in the stage change lottery (step S852). Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. It should be noted that other conditions can be applied without being limited to the above conditions.

  In addition, the probability of the lottery and the variation time of the symbols mentioned in the embodiment (one embodiment and another embodiment), the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, the closing time, the number of times of opening, the number of winning balls, etc. The conditions are merely examples, and these may be modified as appropriate. Further, the arrangement of the various start gates 20 and 21, the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30 and the like in the game area 8 may be variously modified.

  Also, in the embodiment, a description has been given of a type of gaming machine that can be won by an operation lottery related to a normal symbol, and further won by an internal lottery related to a special symbol, the number of limiters is set, and a large number of game balls can be acquired. Also, the present invention can be applied as appropriate to a type of gaming machine that can win a large amount of game balls by winning in an internal lottery concerning special symbols. Specifically, FIGS. 41 to 50 and FIGS. 51 to 63 have been described as effects related to the normal symbols. However, the normal symbols are replaced with special symbols and also executed with respect to FIGS. 41 to 50 and FIGS. can do. In addition, the lottery, production setting, etc. (for main control and production control) can be applied as appropriate by replacing the normal symbol with a special symbol.

  Also, in the embodiment, the main notice effect category is a stage specific peculiar notice effect category in the prior determination regarding the predetermined change, and when the stage change effect is executed before the start of the change, the main notice effect category is selected. Although deleted, the present invention is not limited to the main notice effect category, and can be appropriately applied to reach effect contents. Specifically, the content of the reach effect is the reach effect content specific to the stage in advance determination regarding a predetermined change, and when the stage change effect is executed before the start of the change, the content of the reach effect is deleted. be able to.

  In addition, the structure of the pachinko machine 1 and the board surface configuration are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Middle start gate 21 Right start gate 28 Variable start winning device 30 Variable winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 Special symbol display device 42 Liquid crystal display device 70 Main control Device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery on the condition that a lottery opportunity has occurred during the game;
The predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery execution means, and a symbol display means for displaying a variation of a symbol set in advance according to the result of the predetermined lottery,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, a notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect that suggests that the result of the predetermined lottery may have been won,
In the variation display of the symbol, at least a background effect execution means for executing a background effect using a predetermined background image;
A lottery opportunity holding means for holding the lottery opportunity when a new lottery opportunity occurs in a state where the start condition for starting the variable display of the symbol is not satisfied;
Prior determination means for determining in advance information related to the lottery opportunity held by the lottery opportunity holding means;
In a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, when a preliminary determination result regarding the reserved lottery trigger is obtained by the preliminary determination unit, the lottery trigger according to the preliminary lottery trigger based on the preliminary determination result is obtained. Preliminary effect pre-selecting means for determining in advance the information related to the preliminary effect that is performed for the variable display of symbols,
Prior notice effect pre-storage means for storing the determination result by the prior notice effect pre-selection means;
When a predetermined effect execution opportunity occurs, a background change effect execution means for executing a background change effect in a mode of changing the background image of the background effect to another background image;
In the case where the background change effect is executed before the symbol variation display corresponding to the reserved lottery trigger is performed with respect to the symbol variation display regarding the reserved lottery trigger by the symbol display means. While determining the content of the notice effect without using the determination result, if the background change effect has not been executed before the variable display of the symbol according to the reserved lottery opportunity is performed A gaming machine comprising: a notice effect content determination means for determining the content of the notice effect using a determination result.